Q Logic Switch 59226 00 B User Guide

R
S i m p l i f y  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Firmware Version 5.0  
59226-00 B  
Page i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
59226-00 B  
Page iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Page iv  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
59226-00 B  
Page v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Page vi  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
59226-00 B  
Page vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Page viii  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
59226-00 B  
Page ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
List of Figures  
Figure  
Page  
Page x  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
List of Tables  
Table  
Page  
59226-00 B  
Page xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Notes  
Page xii  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Introduction  
This manual describes the switch management tools which include the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager application (version 5.00) and the Command Line Interface (CLI)  
for the SANbox 1400 Series Fibre Channel switch (firmware version 5.0). The  
SANbox 1400 Series switch is a 10 port non-blocking Fibre Channel switch. This  
manual defines the features, components, and performance characteristics of the  
SANbox 1400 Series switch. The SANsurfer Switch Manager application is the  
primary focus of this manual which is organized as follows:  
Section 1 describes the intended audience for this manual, related  
materials, and technical support.  
Section 2 describes how to use SANsurfer Switch Manager, its menus, and  
its displays.  
Section 3 describes fabric management tasks.  
Section 4 describes switch management tasks.  
Section 5 describes port and device management tasks.  
Appendix A describes the command line interface.  
A glossary of terms and an index are also provided.  
1.1  
Intended Audience  
This manual introduces the switch management products and explains their  
installation and use. It is intended for users responsible for installing and using  
switch management tools.  
1.2  
Related Materials  
Refer to the following manuals for information about switch hardware and  
installation.  
SANbox 1400 Series Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide, publication  
number 59225-00.  
59226-00 B  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 – Introduction  
JDOM License  
S
1.3  
JDOM License  
This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project  
(http://www.jdom.org/). Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Brett McLaughlin & Jason  
Hunter. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,  
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1.  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this  
list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.  
2.  
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions, and the disclaimer that follows these conditions in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3.  
4.  
The name "JDOM" must not be used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written  
permission, please contact [email protected].  
Products derived from this software may not be called "JDOM", nor may  
"JDOM" appear in their name, without prior written permission from the  
JDOM Project Management ([email protected]).  
In addition, we request (but do not require) that you include in the end-user  
documentation provided with the redistribution and/or in the software itself an  
acknowledgement equivalent to the following: "This product includes software  
developed by the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/)."  
Alternatively, the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at  
http://www.jdom.org/images/logos.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS  
OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF  
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on  
behalf of the JDOM Project and was originally created by Brett McLaughlin  
<[email protected]> and Jason Hunter <[email protected]>. For more information  
on the JDOM Project, please see <http://www.jdom.org/>.  
1-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 – Introduction  
Technical Support  
A
1.4  
Technical Support  
Customers should contact their authorized maintenance provider for technical  
support of their QLogic switch products. QLogic-direct customers may contact  
QLogic Technical Support; others will be redirected to their authorized  
maintenance provider.  
Visit the QLogic support Web site listed in Contact Information for the latest  
firmware and software updates.  
1.4.1  
Availability  
QLogic Technical Support for products under warranty is available during local  
standard working hours excluding QLogic Observed Holidays.  
1.4.2  
Training  
QLogic offers certification training for the technical professional for both the  
SANblade™ HBAs and the SANbox 1400 Series switches. From the training link  
at www.qlogic.com, you may choose Electronic-Based Training or schedule an  
intensive "hands-on" Certification course.  
Technical Certification courses include installation, maintenance and  
troubleshooting QLogic SAN products. Upon demonstrating knowledge using live  
equipment, QLogic awards a certificate identifying the student as a Certified  
Professional. The training professionals at QLogic may be reached by email at  
59226-00 B  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 – Introduction  
Technical Support  
S
1.4.3  
Contact Information  
Support Headquarters  
QLogic Corporation  
12984 Valley View Road  
Eden Prairie, MN 55344-3657  
USA  
QLogic Web Site  
Technical Support Web Site  
Technical Support Email  
Technical Training Email  
North American Region  
Email  
+1-952-932-4040  
+1 952-932-4018  
Phone  
Fax  
Europe, Middle East, and Africa Region  
Email  
Phone Numbers by Language  
+353 1 6924960 - English  
+353 1 6924961 - Français  
+353 1 6924962 - Deutsch  
+353 1 6924963 - Español  
+353 1 6924964 - Português  
+353 1 6924965 - Italiano  
Asia Pacific Region  
Email  
Phone Numbers by Language  
+63-2-885-6712 - English  
+63-2-885-6713 - (Mandarin)  
+63-2-885-6714 - (Japanese)  
+63-2-885-6715 - (Korean)  
Latin and South America Region  
Email  
Phone Numbers by Language  
+52 55 5278 7016 - English  
+52 55 5278 7017 - Español  
+52 55 5278 7015 - Português  
1-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Workstation Requirements  
S
2.1  
Workstation Requirements  
The requirements for fabric management workstations running SANsurfer Switch  
Manager are described in Table 2-1:  
Table 2-1. Workstation Requirements  
Windows® 2000/2003/XP  
Solaris™ 8/9/10  
Operating System  
Linux® Red Hat® EL 3.x  
S.u.S.E® Linux 9.0 Enterprise  
MacOS X® 10.3  
Memory  
256 MB or more  
Disk Space  
Processor  
150 MB per installation  
500 MHz or faster  
Hardware  
CD-ROM drive, RJ-45 Ethernet port  
Internet Browser  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 5.0 and later  
Netscape® Navigator® 4.72 and later  
Mozilla™ 1.02 and later  
Safari®  
Java 2 Run Time Environment to support the web applet  
Telnet workstations require an RJ-45 Ethernet port or an RS-232 serial port and  
an operating system with a Telnet client.  
2.2  
Installing the Management Application  
You can manage the switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone  
application or as a part of SANsurfer Management Suite™. SANsurfer  
Management Suite is QLogic’s integrated fabric management application,  
managing both HBAs and switches.  
If your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Switch Manager Disk, refer to  
“SANsurfer Switch Manager” on page 2-3 for instructions on how to install  
SANsurfer Switch Manager.  
If your switch was shipped with a SANsurfer Management Suite Disk, refer  
to “SANsurfer Management Suite” on page 2-4 for instructions on how to  
install and upgrade SANsurfer Management Suite.  
2-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
A
2.2.1  
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
You can install SANsurfer Switch Manager on a Windows, Linux, Solaris, or  
MacOS X workstation. To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application from  
the SANsurfer Switch Manager installation disk, Close all programs currently  
running, and insert the SANsurfer Switch Manager Installation Disk into the  
management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
For a Windows platform:  
1.  
From the tabs on the top of the product introduction screen, click SANsurfer  
Switch Manager.  
2.  
3.  
Locate your platform in the table and click Install.  
Double click on the Windows_5.00.xx.exe file to begin installation.  
If the product introduction screen does not open in step 2, open the CD with  
Windows Explorer and run the installation program with the following path:  
Switch_Manager\Windows_5.00.xx.xx.exe  
For a Linux platform:  
Open the CD and run the installation program with the following path:  
Switch_Manager/Linux_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
If there is no CD-ROM icon, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open an xterm or other terminal window.  
Mount the CD-ROM. From a shell prompt, enter the following:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Change directory to the location of the install program:  
cd /mnt/cdrom/Switch_Manager  
Enter the following command to make the install file executable:  
chmod +x Linux_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions.  
./Linux_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
59226-00 B  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
S
For a Solaris platform:  
1.  
Open a terminal window. If the disk isn’t already mounted, enter the  
following command:  
volcheck  
2.  
Enter following command to move to the directory on the CD that contains  
the executable:  
cd /cdrom/cdrom0/Switch_Manager  
3.  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions:  
Solaris_5.00.xx.xx.bin  
For a Mac OS X platform:  
1.  
Open the CD and move to the following folder:  
Switch_Manager  
2.  
3.  
Double click the application zip file (MacOSX_5.00.xx.xx.zip). This will place  
the install program on your desktop.  
Locate the Install program icon on your desktop, execute it, and follow the  
installation instructions.  
2.2.2  
SANsurfer Management Suite  
The following instructions describe how to install SANsurfer Management Suite  
and upgrade SANsurfer Switch Manager. You can install SANsurfer Management  
Suite (SMS) on a Windows, Linux, or Solaris workstation. Choose the instructions  
for your workstation:  
2.2.2.1  
SMS Installation for Windows  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite  
Installation Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
1.  
If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default  
browser, do the following:  
a.  
Using Windows Explorer, double-click the drive letter which contains  
the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk.  
b.  
Locate and double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer  
Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
A
2.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox 1400 area.  
In the Operating System column, click the Win NT/2000 link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download  
dialog.  
6.  
You can run the installation file from the CD-ROM or download the  
installation file to your hard drive. Choose one of the following:  
Open the installation file from the CD-ROM and follow the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager installation instructions.  
Specify a location in which to save the  
sansurfer_windows_install.exe file, and click the Save button.  
Double-click the saved sansurfer_windows_install.exe file and  
follow the installation instructions.  
7.  
8.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file from the SANsurfer Management Suite installation  
directory. You can also start SANsurfer Management Suite by clicking the  
SANsurfer icon (if installed) on the desktop or from the Start menu. In SMS,  
Click the Switch tab in the left pane. From the Help menu, select About ...  
and make note of the version number. Close SANsurfer Management Suite.  
To ensure you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Windows under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed, download the new version and proceed to step 9. Otherwise,  
no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation is complete.  
9.  
To start the installer, open the zip file and run the  
SANsurferSwitchMgr_Windows_5.00.xx.exe file.  
10. When prompted for an installation directory, click the Choose button and  
select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in  
step 6. The default SMS installation directory is C:\Program Files\QLogic  
Corporation\SANsurfer. Click the Next button.  
11. When prompted for the location in which to create the program icons, click  
the In an Existing Group radio button, then specify the same group that  
was used for the SMS installation. The default SMS group is "QLogic  
Management Suite". Click the Next button.  
12. Click the Install button to the start the installation. When the installation is  
complete, click the Done button.  
59226-00 B  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
S
13. In the SMS install directory, enter the following command to execute the  
chglax.bat file. If prompted to overwrite an existing file, enter Yto do so.  
chglax.bat  
14. Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as  
you did in step 7 and confirm that the new version is running.  
2.2.2.2  
SMS Installation for Linux  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management Suite  
Installation Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
1.  
If a file browser dialog opens showing icons for the contents of the CD-ROM,  
double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer Management  
Suite start page. If a file browser does not open, double-click the CD-ROM  
icon to open the browser. If there is no CD-ROM icon, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
Open an xterm or other terminal window.  
Mount the CD-ROM. From a shell prompt, enter the following  
command:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
c.  
Execute your web browser to view the Start_Here.htm document  
using one of the following commands:  
mozilla file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
or  
netscape file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
d.  
The SANsurfer Management Suite start page opens in your browser.  
2.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox 1400 area.  
In the Operating System column, click the Linux link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the File Download  
dialog.  
6.  
7.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_linux_install.bin file, and click  
the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_linux_install.bin file was saved, and make the file executable.  
chmod +x sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions  
./sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
8.  
2-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
A
9.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file in the installation directory. Click the Switch tab from the  
left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager. From the Help menu, select  
About ... and make note of the release version number. Close SANsurfer  
Management Suite.  
10. To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed on your workstation, down load the new version and proceed  
to step 11. Otherwise, no upgrade is needed and the SMS installation  
is complete.  
11. From the tar.gz file, extract the SANsurferSwitchMgr_Linux_5.00.xx.bin  
file and make the file executable.  
chmod +x sansurferswitchmgr_linux_x.xx.xx.bin  
12. Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions.  
./sansurferswitchmgr_linux_x.xx.xx.bin  
13. When prompted for an installation directory, click the Choose button and  
select the same folder as the SANsurfer Management Suite installation in  
step 9. The default SMS installation directory is  
/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer.  
14. Enter the following script command from the installation directory:  
./chglax  
15. Start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as you  
did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running.  
59226-00 B  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
S
2.2.2.3  
SMS Installation for Solaris  
To install the SANsurfer Switch Manager application on Solaris from the  
SANsurfer Management Suite CD-ROM, do the following:  
1.  
Insert the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk into the management  
workstation CD-ROM drive. If the SANsurfer Management Suite start page  
does not open in your default browser, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Right-click the Workspace Menu.  
Select File, then select File Manager.  
In File Manager, double-click the CD-ROM folder, and then  
double-click the Sansurfer folder.  
d.  
In the Sansurfer folder, double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open  
the SANsurfer Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, click the SANbox Switch  
Software button.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox 1400 area.  
In the Operating System column, click the Solaris SPARC link.  
Click the SANsurfer Management Software link to open the Save As  
dialog.  
6.  
7.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_solaris_install.bin file and click  
the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_solaris_install.bin file was saved, and enter the following:  
chmod +x sansurfer_solaris_install.bin  
Execute the install program and follow the installation instructions:  
./sansurfer_solaris_install.bin  
8.  
9.  
When the installation is complete, start SANsurfer Management Suite using  
the SANsurfer file in the installation directory. Click the Switch tab from the  
left pane to open SANsurfer Switch Manager. From the Help menu, select  
About ... and make note of the release version number. Close SANsurfer  
Management Suite.  
2-8  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Installing the Management Application  
A
10. To ensure that you are using the most recent version of SANsurfer Switch  
Manager, visit the QLogic support web page and go to Drivers, Software and  
a.  
Select your switch model from the pull-down menu. Locate the  
description for SANsurfer Switch Manager for Linux under  
"Management Software".  
b.  
If the release version number (5.00.xx) is greater than what is currently  
installed on your workstation, down load the new version. Otherwise,  
no upgrade is needed.  
11. Open the tar file and save the  
SANsurferSwitchMgr_QLGCsol_5.00.xx.bin file in a folder and make the  
file executable.  
# chmod +x sansurferswitchmgr_QLGCsol_x.xx.xx  
12. Install the new SANsurfer Switch Manager package:  
# pkgadd -d sansurferswitchmgr_QLGCsol_x.xx.xx  
13. Change directories to the package location:  
# cd /usr/opt/QLGCsol/bin  
14. Locate and execute the file sbm_over_sms.sh:  
# ./sbm_over_sms.sh  
15. When prompted for the SMS installation directory, enter d if SMS was  
installed in it’s default directory (/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer).  
Otherwise, enter the path name for the SMS installation directory. The script  
will copy the necessary files to the specified installation directory.  
16. Restart SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management suite as  
you did in step 9 and confirm that the new version is running.  
59226-00 B  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
S
2.3  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
You can start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application or from  
SANsurfer Management Suite.  
NOTE:  
After the switch is operational, you can also open the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager web applet, by entering the switch IP address in an  
internet browser. If your workstation does not have the Java 2 Run  
Time Environment program, you will be prompted to download it.  
To start SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone application, do the  
following.  
1.  
Start the SANsurfer Switch Manager using one of the following  
methods:  
For Windows, double-click the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
shortcut, or select SANsurfer Switch Manager from Start menu,  
depending on how you installed the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
application. From a command line, you can enter the  
SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command:  
<install_directory>SANsurfer_Switch_Manager.exe  
For Linux, Solaris, or Mac OS X, enter the  
SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command:  
<install_directory>./SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
2.  
In the Initial Start dialog, click the Open Configuration Wizard button.  
When you power up the switch, the Configuration Wizard will  
recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process.  
2-10  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
A
To start SANsurfer Switch Manager from SANsurfer Management Suite, do  
the following.  
1.  
Start the SANsurfer Management Suite application using one of the  
following methods:  
For Windows, double-click the SANsurfer shortcut, or select  
SANsurfer from Start menu, depending on how you installed the  
SANsurfer application. From a command line, enter the following  
command:  
<install_directory>\SANsurfer.exe  
For Linux or Solaris enter the SANsurfer command:  
<install_directory>./SANsurfer  
2.  
3.  
From the SANsurfer Management Suite home page, click the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager button.  
In the Initial Start dialog, click the Open Configuration Wizard button.  
When you power up the switch, the Configuration Wizard will  
recognize the switch and lead you through the configuration process.  
The application opens with the Initial Start dialog shown in Figure 2-1. If you prefer  
not to see this dialog, check the Don’t show this dialog again box. This has the  
same effect as disabling the Display Initial Startup Dialog preference. Refer to  
about setting preferences.  
Figure 2-1. Initial Startup Dialog  
59226-00 B  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Starting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
S
Click the Open Existing Fabric radio button to open the Add a New Fabric  
dialog, which prompts you for a fabric name, IP address, account name, and  
password. Refer to “Adding a Fabric” on page 3-5.  
Click the Open Existing Fabric View File radio button to open the Open  
View dialog which prompts you to specify a fabric view file that you saved  
Click the Start Application Without Specifying a Fabric radio button to  
open the SANsurfer Switch Manager window shown in Figure 2-2.  
Click the Open Configuration Wizard radio button to open the Config  
Wizard to configure a switch, add a new switch, replace/restore a switch, or  
recover or edit an IP configuration of an existing switch.  
Figure 2-2. SANsurfer Switch Manager Window  
2-12  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
A
2.4  
Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
To exit a SANsurfer Switch Manager application session, open the File menu and  
select Exit. If you have not yet defined an encryption key, the Save Default Fabric  
View File dialog, shown in Figure 2-3, prompts you to save the current fabric view  
as the default fabric view file. Enter an encryption key in the Default Fabric File  
Encryption Key field. Re-enter the encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key  
to Confirm field. Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the  
default fabric view file in the working directory.  
Figure 2-3. Save Default Fabric View File Dialog  
The encryption key is used to encrypt the sensitive data in the default fabric view  
page 2-17 for information about changing this encryption key. If an encryption key  
has been defined and the View File Auto Save and Load preferences settings are  
set to Enable, the current fabric view is automatically saved to your default fabric  
view file upon exit future SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions.  
To prevent SANsurfer Switch Manager from prompting you to save the default  
fabric view file between SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions, set the View File  
Auto Save and Load preferences setting to Enable (default). Refer to “Setting  
59226-00 B  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Exiting SANsurfer Switch Manager  
S
In your next SANsurfer Switch Manager session, the Load Default Fabric File  
dialog shown in Figure 2-4 prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to  
specify its encryption key, if there is one. In the Default Fabric File Encryption Key  
field, enter the encryption key and click the Load View File button. If you do not  
want to load the default fabric view file, click the Continue Without Loading  
button to open the SANsurfer Switch Manager with no fabric displayed.  
Figure 2-4. Load Default Fabric File Dialog  
2-14  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
A
2.5  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
The method you use to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager depends on how you  
installed it:  
If you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer  
Management Suite, you must uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite. Refer  
If you installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone program, you  
must uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager directly. Refer to “Standalone  
2.5.1  
SMS Uninstall  
A program to uninstall SANsurfer Management Suite was included as part of the  
SANsurfer Management Suite installation process. Use this method only if you  
installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as part of SANsurfer Management Suite. The  
UninstallData folder in the installation directory contains the uninstall program,  
SANsurferUninstaller.  
The default installation directories are:  
For Windows: C:\Program Files\QLogic_Corporation\SANsurfer  
For Linux: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer  
For Solaris: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer  
To uninstall the SANsurfer Management Suite application, do the following:  
For Windows, browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut/link that  
points to the uninstall program file. The uninstall program shortcut is in the  
same folder as the program shortcut (Start menu, program group, on  
desktop, or user specified) that is used to start the SANsurfer Management  
Suite application. Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link, and  
follow the instructions.  
For Linux, execute the link to SANsurferUninstaller.  
<install_directory>/UninstallerData/SANsurferUninstaller  
For Solaris, enter the following command and follow the instructions:  
<install_directory>/UninstallData/SANsurferUninstaller  
59226-00 B  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Uninstalling SANsurfer Switch Manager  
S
2.5.2  
Standalone Uninstall  
A program to uninstall SANsurfer Switch Manager was included as part of the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager installation process. Use this method only if you  
installed SANsurfer Switch Manager as a standalone program. The  
UninstallerData folder in the Install directory contains the uninstall program,  
Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager. Also, a shortcut/link to the uninstall  
program was installed in the installation directory during the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager installation process.  
The default installation directories are:  
For Windows:  
C:\Program Files\QLogic_Corporation\SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
For Linux: /opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
For Solaris: /usr/opt/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
For MacOS X:  
Users/qlogic/Applications/QLogic_Corporation/SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
To uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager application, do the following:  
For Windows, browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut/link that  
points to the uninstall program file. The uninstall program shortcut is in the  
same folder as the program shortcut (Start menu, program group, on  
desktop, or user specified) that is used to start the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager application. Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link,  
and follow the instructions to uninstall the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
application.  
For Linux, Solaris, or MacOS X, execute the link to  
Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager. If no links were created during the  
installation, enter the Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager command from  
the following directory:  
UninstallerData/Uninstall_SANsurfer_Switch_Manager  
2-16  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File  
A
2.6  
Changing the Encryption Key for the Default Fabric View File  
To change the encryption key for the SANsurfer Switch Manager default fabric  
view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Save Default Fabric View File to open the  
Save Default Fabric View File dialog. Enter an encryption key in the Default  
Fabric File Encryption Key field.  
2.  
3.  
Re-enter the same encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm  
field.  
Click the OK button to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric  
view file in the working directory.  
2.7  
Saving and Opening Fabric View Files  
A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file. In addition to the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager default fabric view file, you can save and open your own fabric  
view files. To save a set of fabrics to a file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this fabric view file, you will be  
prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field blank, no  
password will be required when attempting to open this fabric view file.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the view.  
To open a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric view file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file.  
If the fabric view file was saved with a password, enter the password and  
click the OK button.  
Click the OK button to open the view.  
59226-00 B  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences  
S
2.8  
Setting SANsurfer Switch Manager Preferences  
Using the preferences settings, you can:  
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files.  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help. The  
Browser Location field is not supported/displayed for Mac OS X platforms.  
Enable (default) or disable the view file auto save and load feature. Refer to  
the default fabric view file.  
Enable (default) or disable the use of the Initial Start Dialog at the beginning  
of a SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Refer to “Starting SANsurfer  
Switch Manager” on page 2-10 for information about the Initial Start Dialog.  
After a default fabric view file is created, this setting has no effect.  
Enable (default) or disable the display of the Nonsecure Connection Check  
dialog upon login when establishing a nonsecure connection.  
Enable (default) or disable the Event Browser. Refer to “Displaying the  
Event Browser” on page 3-11. If the Event Browser is enabled using the  
Preferences dialog as shown in Figure 2-5, the next time SANsurfer Switch  
Manager is started, all events will be displayed. If the Event Browser is  
disabled when SANsurfer Switch Manager is started and later enabled, only  
those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward will  
be displayed.  
Choose the default port view when opening the faceplate display. You can  
set the faceplate to reflect the current port type (default), port speed, port  
operational state, or port transceiver media. Regardless of the default port  
view you choose, you can change the port view in the faceplate display by  
opening the View menu and selecting a different port view option. Refer to  
the corresponding subsection for more information:  
2-18  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using Online Help  
A
To set preferences for your SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu, and select Preferences to open the Preferences dialog  
as shown in Figure 2-5.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Enter, or browse, for paths to the working directory and browser.  
In the Application-wide Options area, choose the preferences you want.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
Figure 2-5. Preferences Dialog – SANsurfer Switch Manager  
2.9  
Using Online Help  
Online help is available for the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and its  
functions. The two ways to open the online help file are: open the Help menu and  
select Help Topics, or click the Help button in the tool bar. You can also display  
context-sensitive help for all SANsurfer Switch Manager dialogs by choosing the  
Help button in the dialog.  
2.10  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information  
To view SANsurfer Switch Manager software version and copyright information,  
open the Help menu and select About....  
59226-00 B  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
S
2.11  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
The SANsurfer Switch Manager application uses two basic displays to manage  
the fabric and individual switches: the topology display and the faceplate display.  
The topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all  
connections between switches. The faceplate display shows the front of a single  
switch and its ports. Both displays share some common elements as shown in  
Menu  
Bar  
Tool Bar  
Topology  
Display  
Graphic  
Window  
Fabric  
Tree  
Data  
Window  
Working Status  
Indicator  
Data Window Tabs  
Faceplate  
Display  
Figure 2-6. SANsurfer Switch Manager Display Elements  
2-20  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
A
2.11.1  
Menu Bars  
The menus and the options offered in them vary depending on the display. For  
example, the Port menu and many of the Switch menu selections are available  
only in the faceplate display.  
2.11.1.1  
Topology Display Menu  
The menu options available in the topology display are shown in Figure 2-7.  
Figure 2-7. Topology Display Menu  
59226-00 B  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
S
2.11.1.2  
Faceplate Display Menu  
The menu options available in the faceplate display are shown in Figure 2-8.  
Figure 2-8. Faceplate Display Menu  
The keyboard shortcut keys vary by display type: topology display and faceplate  
display. In addition to the menu bar, both the topology and faceplate displays have  
context sensitive menus that pop up when you right-click in the graphic window.  
page 2-28 for more information about these popup menus.  
2.11.1.3  
Shortcut Keys  
Shortcut key combinations, available in both the topology and faceplate displays,  
provide an alternative method of accessing menu options. The shortcut key  
combinations are not case-sensitive. For example, to exit the application, press  
Alt+F, then press X.  
2-22  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
A
2.11.2  
Tool Bar  
The tool bar consists of a row of graphical buttons that you can use to access  
SANsurfer Switch Manager functions as shown in Table 2-2. The tool bar buttons  
are an alternative method to using the menu bar. The tool bar can be relocated in  
the display by clicking and dragging the handle at the left edge of the tool bar.  
Table 2-2. Tool Bar Buttons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Add Fabric button - adds a new fabric to the fabric view.  
Open View File button - opens an existing fabric view file.  
Save View As button - saves the current fabric view to a file.  
Refresh button - updates the topology or faceplate display with cur-  
rent information.  
Event Browser button - opens the events browser.  
Edit Zoning button - opens the Edit Zoning dialog (available only in  
faceplate display).  
Help Topics button - opens the online help file.  
The QLogic logo opens a link to the QLogic web site.  
59226-00 B  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
S
2.11.3  
Fabric Tree  
The fabric tree lists the managed fabrics and their switches as shown in  
Figure 2-9. The window width can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the  
moveable window border. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree  
indicates that the entry can be expanded or collapsed. Click this handle or  
double-click the entry to expand or collapse a fabric tree entry. A fabric entry  
expands to show its member switches.  
Fabric  
Entry  
Entry Handle  
Moveable  
Switch  
Window Border  
Entries  
Figure 2-9. Fabric Tree  
Each fabric tree entry has a small icon next to it that uses color to indicate  
operational status.  
A green icon indicates normal operation.  
A yellow icon indicates that a switch is operational, but may require attention  
to maintain maximum performance.  
A red icon indicates a potential failure or non-operational state as when the  
switch is offline.  
A blue icon indicates that a switch is unknown, unreachable, or  
unmanageable.  
If the status of the fabric is not normal, the fabric icon in the fabric tree will indicate  
the reason for the abnormal status. The same message is provided when you rest  
the mouse over the fabric icon in the fabric tree.  
The fabric tree provides access to the topology and faceplate displays for any  
fabric or switch.  
To open the topology display from the fabric tree, click a fabric entry.  
To open the faceplate display from the fabric tree, click a switch entry.  
2-24  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
SANsurfer Switch Manager User Interface  
A
2.11.4  
Graphic Window  
The graphic window, shown in Figure 2-6, presents graphic information about  
fabrics and switches such as the fabric topology and the switch faceplate. The  
window height can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the window border that it  
shares with the data window.  
2.11.5  
Data Window and Tabs  
The data window presents a table of data and statistics associated with the  
selected tab. Use the scroll bar to browse through the data. The window length  
can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the border that it shares with the graphic  
window.  
Adjust the column width by moving the pointer over the column heading border  
shared by two columns until a right/left arrow graphic is displayed. Click and drag  
the arrow to the desired width.  
The data window tabs present options for the type of information to display in the  
data window. These options vary depending on the display.  
2.11.6  
Working Status Indicator  
The working status indicator, located in the lower right corner of the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager window, shows when the management workstation is exchanging  
information with the fabric. As conditions change, the fabric forwards this  
information to the management workstation where it is reflected in the various  
displays.  
59226-00 B  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
S
2.12  
Using the Topology Display  
The topology display shown in Figure 2-10 receives information from the selected  
fabric and displays its topology. Switches and inter-switch links (ISLs) appear in  
the graphic window and use color to indicate status. Consider the following  
topology display features:  
Figure 2-10. Topology Display  
2-26  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
A
2.12.1  
Switch and Link Status  
Switch icon shape and color provide information about the switch and its  
operational state. Lines represent links between switches. The topology display  
uses green to indicate normal operation, yellow to indicate operational with errors,  
red to indicate a potential failure or non-operational state, and blue to indicate  
unknown, unreachable, or unmanageable. Refer to “Fabric Status” on page 3-9  
for more information about topology display icons.  
2.12.2  
Working with Switches and Links  
Switch and link icons are selectable and moveable, and serve as access points for  
other displays and menus. You select switches and links to display information  
about them, modify their configuration, or delete them from the display.  
Context-sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right-click on a switch or  
link icon, or in the background of the topology display graphic window.  
2.12.2.1  
Selecting Switches and Links  
Selected switch icons are highlighted in light blue. Selected ISLs are displayed as  
a heavier line. You can select switches and links in the following ways:  
To select a switch or a link, click the icon or link.  
To select multiple switches or links, hold down the Control key and select.  
To select all switches or links, right-click anywhere in the graphic window  
background. Select Select All Switches or Select All Links from the popup  
menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key, and select the item again.  
To cancel all selections, click in the graphic window background.  
59226-00 B  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
S
2.12.2.2  
Arranging Switches in the Display  
You can arrange individual switch icons in the topology display or allow SANsurfer  
Switch Manager to arrange all switch icons for you:  
To move an individual switch icon, click and drag the icon to another location  
in the graphic window. Links stretch or contract to remain connected.  
To arrange all switch icons in the topology display automatically, open the  
View menu and select Layout Topology.  
By default, the Toggle Auto Layout box in the View menu is checked which  
causes SANsurfer Switch Manager to arrange the icons when you select Layout  
Topology.  
You can save a custom arrangement, or layout, and restore that layout during a  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Begin by arranging the icons, then open the  
View menu and select Remember Layout. To restore the saved layout, open the  
View menu, uncheck the Toggle Auto Layout box, and select Layout Topology.  
2.12.2.3  
Opening the Faceplate and Topology Display Popup Menus  
The topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all  
connections between switches. The faceplate display shows the front of a single  
switch and its ports. Menu options vary with each type of popup menu.  
To open the fabric popup menu in the topology display, right-click the graphic  
window background.  
To open the switch popup menu in the topology display, right-click the switch  
icon in the graphic window.  
To open the link popup menu in the topology display, right-click the link.  
To open the switch popup menu in the faceplate display, right-click the  
faceplate in the graphic window.  
2-28  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
A
2.12.3  
Topology Data Windows  
The topology display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
Devices – displays information about devices (hosts and storage targets)  
connected to the switch. Refer to “Devices Data Window” on page 3-15 for  
more information.  
Active Zoneset – displays the active zone set for the fabric including zones  
and their member ports. Refer to “Active Zone Set Data Window” on  
page 3-16 for more information about this data window. Refer to “Zoning a  
Fabric” on page 3-20 for information about zone sets and zones.  
Switch – displays current network and switch configuration data for the  
selected switches. Refer to “Switch Data Window” on page 4-8 for more  
information.  
Link – displays information about the inter-switch links. Refer to “Link Data  
Window” on page 3-17 to for more information.  
59226-00 B  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
S
2.13  
Using the Faceplate Display  
The faceplate display shown in Figure 2-11 displays the switch name and  
operational state, and port status. Consider the following functional elements of  
the faceplate display:  
Figure 2-11. Faceplate Display  
2.13.1  
Port Views and Status  
Port color and text provide information about the port and its operational state.  
Green indicates active; gray indicates inactive. The faceplate display provides the  
following views of port status corresponding to the View menu options in the  
faceplate display. Refer to “Monitoring Port Status” on page 5-2 for more  
information about these displays.  
Port type  
Port state  
Port speed  
Port media  
Context-sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right-click the faceplate  
image or a port icon in the faceplate display.  
2-30  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
A
2.13.2  
Working with Ports  
Ports are selectable and serve as access points for other displays and menus.  
You select ports to display information about them in the data window or to modify  
them. Context-sensitive popup menus are displayed when you right-click the  
faceplate image or on a port icon in the faceplate display.  
2.13.2.1  
Selecting Ports  
You can select ports in the following ways. Selected ports are outlined in white.  
To select a port, click the port in the faceplate display.  
To select a range of consecutive ports, select a port, then press and hold the  
shift key and select another port. The application selects both end ports and  
all ports in between in port number sequence.  
To select several non-consecutive ports, hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
To select all ports, right-click on the faceplate image. Select Select All Ports  
from the popup menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key and select it again.  
2.13.2.2  
Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu  
To open the popup menu, right-click on the faceplate image to present the  
following tasks.  
Refresh the switch  
Select all ports  
Manage switch properties  
Manage network properties  
Manage SNMP properties  
Extended credits wizard  
Manage port properties  
Change the port symbolic name  
Run the port loopback tests  
Security consistence checklist  
If no ports are selected, the port-related tasks will be unavailable in the menu.  
Right-click a port to open the Port popup menu. Hold down the Shift or Control key  
to select more than one port. If multiple ports are selected, right-click one of the  
selected ports.  
59226-00 B  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANsurfer Switch Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
S
2.13.3  
Faceplate Data Windows  
The faceplate display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
Devices – displays information about devices (hosts and storage targets)  
connected to the switch.  
Switch – displays current switch configuration data.  
Port Statistics – displays performance data for the selected ports.  
Port Information – displays information for the selected ports.  
Configured Zonesets – displays all zone sets, zones, and zone membership  
in the zoning database.  
2-32  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 3  
Managing Fabrics  
This section describes the following tasks that manage fabrics:  
3.1  
Fabric Security  
The components of Fibre Channel fabric security are:  
3.1.1  
User Account Security  
User account security he process by which your user account and password are  
authenticated with the list of valid user accounts and passwords. The switch  
validates your account and password when you attempt to add a fabric using  
SANsurfer Switch Manager or log in to a switch through Telnet. Your system  
administrator defines accounts, passwords, and authority levels that are stored on  
the switch. Refer to “Managing User Accounts” on page 4-2 for more information.  
The Admin account possesses Admin authority which grants full access to all  
tasks of the SANsurfer Switch Manager menu system. The switch validates your  
user account and SANsurfer Switch Manager grants access to its menus  
according to your authority level. If you do not have Admin authority, you are  
limited to monitoring tasks.  
NOTE:  
If a user is logged into a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager or  
CLI, and an administrator changes user access rights or passwords,  
existing logins will not be affected by the new settings. Login access  
and privileges are only checked for a new login request.  
59226-00 B  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Fabric Security  
S
3.1.2  
Fabric Services  
Fabric services security includes SNMP and In-band management. Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the protocol governing network  
management and monitoring of network devices. SNMP security consists of a  
read community string and a write community string, that are basically the  
passwords that control read and write access to the switch. The read community  
string ("public") and write community string ("private") are set at the factory to  
these well-known defaults and should be changed if SNMP is enabled using the  
SNMP Properties dialog. If SNMP is enabled (default) and the read and write  
community strings have not been changed from their defaults, you risk unwanted  
access to the switch. Refer to “Enabling SNMP Configuration” on page 3-2 for  
more information. SNMP is enabled by default.  
In-band management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager, SNMP, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with in-band  
management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection. Refer to “Enabling In-band Management” on  
page 3-2 for more information.  
3.1.2.1  
Enabling SNMP Configuration  
To enable SNMP configuration, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select SNMP  
Properties to open the SNMP Properties dialog.  
In the SNMP Configuration area, place a check mark in the SNMP Enabled  
check box.  
Click the OK button to save the change to the database.  
3.1.2.2  
Enabling In-band Management  
To enable In-band Management, do the following:  
1.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Switch  
Properties to open the Switch Properties dialog.  
2.  
3.  
Click the In-band Management Enable button.  
Click the OK button to save the change to the database.  
3-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
A
3.1.3  
Security Consistency Checklist  
The Security Consistency Checklist dialog enables you to compare  
security-related features on switches to check for inconsistencies. Any changes  
must be made through the appropriate dialog, such as Network Properties dialog,  
Switch Properties dialog, or SNMP Properties dialog. To open the Security  
Consistency Checklist dialog, open the Switch menu and select Security  
Consistency Checklist.  
3.2  
Tracking Fabric Firmware and Software Versions  
The Fabric Tracker option enables you to generate a snapshot or baseline of  
current system version information, which can be viewed, analyzed and compared  
to other snapshot files, and exported to a file. Information includes date and time,  
SANsurfer Switch Manager version, switch active firmware version, device  
hardware, drivers, and firmware version from FDMI.  
The Snapshot Analyzer option enables you to:  
Compare two snapshots  
Detect mismatches of firmware and driver versions  
Detect devices that have been moved, added to or removed from the fabric.  
3.2.1  
Saving a Version Snapshot  
To save the current snapshot to an XML file, open the Fabric menu, select Fabric  
Tracker, and select Save Snapshot. To view and analyze system version  
information, open the Fabric menu, select Fabric Tracker, and select Analyze  
Snapshots. The Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog, shown in Figure 3-1,  
opens with the Summary, Differences and Reports tab pages. Click the Browse  
buttons to open and view the snapshot files in the corresponding tab pages. Click  
the Close button to exit the Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis dialog. The color  
key below the scrollable area defines the meanings of the colors used.  
The Summary tab page shows a brief description of the changes that have  
occurred between the older snapshot and the newer one. Use the Summary tab  
page quickly view what has changed.  
59226-00 B  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
S
3.2.2  
Viewing and Comparing Version Snapshots  
The Differences tab page shows a side-by-side comparison of two snapshots. The  
timestamp of each snapshot is displayed above the scroll area showing that  
snapshot. The background color of the older snapshot is darker than the  
background of the newer snapshot. The arrow icon between the snapshot  
selectors always points from the older snapshot to the newer one. If the two  
snapshots have the same timestamp, the arrow will not be displayed. The scroll  
bars are synchronized to view the same portion of each snapshot file  
simultaneously. Click and drag the separator bar between the two panes to resize  
each pane. At the top of the separator bar between the two panes, click the  
left/right arrows to close the corresponding pane. The left/right arrows move to  
one side.  
3.2.3  
Exporting Version Snapshots to a File  
The Reports tab page enables you to select one of several reports to save to a  
text file. The are two types of reports. The Summary report type shows the same  
format displayed on the Summary tab page without the color highlighting. The  
Detail report type shows a detailed breakdown of the differences. Use the Export  
button to save the selected report to a text file.  
Figure 3-1. Fabric Version Snapshot Analysis Dialog  
3.3  
Managing the Fabric Database  
A fabric database contains the set of fabrics that you have added during a  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session. Initially, if you do not open an existing fabric  
or fabric view file, the SANsurfer Switch Manager application opens with an empty  
fabric database.  
3-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
A
3.3.1  
Adding a Fabric  
To add a fabric to the database, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric to open the Add a New Fabric  
dialog as shown in Figure 3-2.  
Figure 3-2. Add a New Fabric Dialog  
2.  
3.  
Enter a fabric name (optional) and the IP address of the switch through  
which to manage the fabric.  
Enter an account name and password. The factory account name and  
password are "admin" and "password". The password is for the switch and is  
stored in the switch firmware. Refer to “Managing User Accounts” on  
page 4-2 for information about creating user accounts.  
4.  
Click the Add Fabric button.  
NOTE:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions  
reserved as follows:  
4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as  
management server and SNMP  
9 high priority Telnet sessions  
6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband  
and out-of-band logins, Application Programming Interface  
(API) inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins.  
Additional logins will be refused.  
59226-00 B  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
S
3.3.2  
Removing a Fabric  
To delete a fabric file from the database, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a fabric in the fabric tree.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Remove Fabric.  
3.3.3  
Opening a Fabric View File  
A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file. To open an existing view  
file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File, or click the Open button. If  
the fabric you are currently viewing has changed, you will be prompted to  
save the changes to the fabric view file with the Save View dialog before  
opening a different view file.  
2.  
3.  
In the Open View dialog, enter the name of the file to open, and enter a file  
password, if a password was entered when this fabric view file was saved.  
Click the OK button.  
3.3.4  
Saving a Fabric View File  
To save a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File menu, and select Save View As.  
In the Save View dialog, enter a new file name.  
Enter a file password, if necessary.  
Click the OK button.  
3.3.5  
Rediscovering a Fabric  
After making changes to or deleting switches from a fabric view, it may be helpful  
to again view the actual fabric configuration. The rediscover fabric option clears  
out the current fabric information being displayed, and rediscovers all switch  
information. To rediscover a fabric, open the Fabric menu, and select Rediscover  
Fabric. The rediscover function is more comprehensive than the refresh function.  
3-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
A
3.3.6  
Deleting Switches and Links  
The SANsurfer Switch Manager application does not automatically delete  
switches or links that have failed or have been physically removed from the fabric.  
In these cases, you can delete switches and links to bring the display up to date. If  
you delete a switch or a link that is still active, the SANsurfer Switch Manager  
application will restore it automatically. You can also refresh the display. To delete  
a switch from the topology display, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more switches in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
To delete a link, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more links in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
3.3.7  
Adding a New Switch to a Fabric  
If there are no special conditions to be configured for the new switch, simply plug  
in the switch and the switch becomes functional with the default fabric  
configuration. The default fabric configuration settings are:  
Fabric zoning is sent to the switch from the fabric.  
All ports will be GL_Ports.  
The default IP address 10.0.0.1 is assigned to the switch without a gateway  
or boot protocol configured (RARP, BOOTP, and DHCP).  
If you are adding a new switch to a fabric and do not want to accept the default  
fabric configuration, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If the switch is not new from the factory, reset the switch to the factory  
configuration before adding the switch to the fabric by selecting Restore  
Factory Defaults in the Switch menu from the faceplate display.  
If you want to manage the switch through the Ethernet port, you must first  
configure the IP address using the Network Properties dialog or the  
Configuration Wizard.  
Configure any special switch settings. Consider configuring the Default  
Visibility setting to None in the Zoning Config dialog to prevent devices from  
finding other devices on all switches in the fabric until the new switch is  
configured. To open the Zoning Config dialog, open the Zoning menu, and  
select Edit Zoning Config.  
4.  
5.  
Plug in the inter-switch links (ISL), but do not connect the devices.  
Configure the port types for the new switch using the Port Properties dialog.  
The ports can be G_Port, GL_Port, F_Port, FL_Port, or Donor.  
59226-00 B  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
S
6.  
7.  
Connect the devices to the switch.  
Make any necessary zoning changes using the Edit Zoning dialog. To open  
the Edit Zoning dialog, open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning. If  
you changed the Default Visibility setting in the Zoning Config dialog from All  
to None, change that setting back to All. To open the Zoning Config dialog,  
open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning Config.  
3.3.8  
Replacing a Failed Switch  
The archive/restore works for all switches. However, the Restore menu item is not  
available for the in-band switches. You can only restore a switch out-of-band (the  
fabric management switch). There are certain parameters that are not archived,  
and these are not restored by SANsurfer Switch Manager. Refer to “Archiving a  
archive and restore. Use the following procedure to replace a failed switch for  
which an archive is available.  
1.  
At the failed switch:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the AC cords.  
Note port locations and remove the interconnection cables and SFPs.  
Remove the failed switch.  
2.  
At the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
Mount the switch in the location where the failed switch was removed.  
Install the SFPs using the same ports as were used on the failed  
switch.  
CAUTION!  
Do not reconnect inter-switch links, target devices, and  
initiator devices at this time. Doing so could invalidate  
the fabric zoning configuration.  
c.  
Attach the AC cords and power up the switch.  
3.  
4.  
Select the failed switch in the topology display. Open the Switch menu and  
select Delete.  
Restore the configuration from the failed switch to the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
Open a new fabric through the replacement switch.  
Open the faceplate display for the replacement switch. Open the  
Switch menu and select Restore.  
c.  
d.  
In the Restore dialog, enter the archive file from the failed switch or  
browse for the file.  
Click the Restore button.  
3-8  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
A
5.  
6.  
Reset the replacement switch to activate the configuration formerly  
possessed by the failed switch including the domain ID and the zoning  
database. Open the Switch menu and select Reset Switch.  
Reconnect the inter-switch links, target devices, and initiator devices to the  
replacement switch using the same ports as were used on the failed switch.  
3.4  
Displaying Fabric Information  
The topology display is your primary tool for monitoring a fabric. The graphic  
window of the topology display provides status information for switches,  
inter-switch links, and the Ethernet connection to the management workstation.  
The data window tabs show device, switch, and active zone set information. The  
Active Zoneset tab shows the zone definitions for the active zone set. Refer to  
information about the Devices and Switch data windows.  
3.4.1  
Fabric Status  
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the display status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
the topology display, do one of the following:  
Click the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
Right-click anywhere in the background of the topology display and select  
Refresh Fabric from the popup menu.  
59226-00 B  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
S
The topology display uses switch and status icons to provide status information  
about switches, inter-switch links, and the Ethernet connection. The switch status  
icons, displayed on the left side of a switch, vary in shape and color. Switches  
controlled by an Ethernet Internet Protocol have a colored Ethernet icon displayed  
on the right side of the switch. A green Ethernet icon indicates normal operation,  
yellow indicates a condition that may require attention to maintain maximum  
performance, and red indicates a potential failure. Table 3-1 shows the different  
switch icons and their meanings.  
Table 3-1. Topology Display Switch and Status Icons  
Switch Icon  
Description  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch  
Normal operation (Green)  
Warning–operational with errors (Yellow)  
Critical–potential failure (Red)  
Unknown–communication status unknown, unreach-  
able, or unmanageable (Blue)  
Fabric Management Switch  
Ethernet connection normal (Green)  
Ethernet connection warning (Yellow)  
Ethernet connection critical (Red)  
Switch is not manageable with this version of SANsurfer  
Switch Manager. Use the management application that  
was shipped with this switch.  
3-10  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
A
3.4.2  
Displaying the Event Browser  
The Event Browser displays a list of events generated by the switches in the fabric  
and the SANsurfer Switch Manager application. Events that are generated by the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager application are not saved on the switch, but can be  
saved to a file during the SANsurfer Switch Manager session.  
Entries in the Event Browser shown in Figure 3-3, are formatted by severity, time  
stamp, source, type, and description. The maximum number of entries allowed in  
the Event Browser is 10,000. The maximum number of entries allowed on a switch  
is 1200. Once the maximum is reached, the event list wraps and the oldest events  
are discarded and replaced with the new events. Event entries from the switch,  
use the switch time stamp, while event entries generated by the application have  
a workstation time stamp. You can filter, sort, and export the contents of the Event  
Browser to a file. The Event Browser begins recording when enabled and  
SANsurfer Switch Manager is running.  
If the Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog, the next time  
SANsurfer Switch Manager is started all events from the switch log will be  
displayed. If the Event Browser is disabled when SANsurfer Switch Manager is  
started and later enabled, only those events from the time the Event Browser was  
enabled and forward will be displayed.  
To display the Event Browser, open the Fabric menu and select Show Event  
Browser, or click the Events button on the tool bar. If the Show Event Browser  
selection or the Events button is grayed-out, you must first enable the Events  
Column Sorting  
Buttons  
Severity  
Column  
Figure 3-3. Events Browser  
59226-00 B  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
S
Severity is indicated in the severity column using icons as described in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2. Severity Levels  
Severity  
Description  
Icon  
Alarm – An Alarm is a "serviceable event". This means that attention by  
the user or field service is required. Alarms are posted asynchronously  
to the screen and cannot be turned off. If the alarm denotes that a sys-  
tem error has occurred, the customer and/or field representative will  
generally be directed to provide a "show support" capture of the switch.  
Critical event – An event that indicates a potential failure. Critical log  
messages are events that warrant notice by the user. By default, these  
log messages will be posted to the screen. Critical log messages do not  
have alarm status as they require no immediate attention from a user or  
service representative.  
Warning event – An event that indicates errors or other conditions that  
may require attention to maintain maximum performance. Warning mes-  
sages will not be posted to the screen unless the log is configured to do  
so. Warning messages are not disruptive and, therefore, do not meet  
the criteria of Critical. The user need not be informed asynchronously.  
No icon  
Informative – An unclassified event that provides supporting informa-  
tion.  
NOTE:  
Events (Alarms, Critical, Warning, and Informative) generated by  
the application are not saved on the switch. They are permanently  
discarded when you close a SANsurfer Switch Manager session,  
but you can save these events to a file on the workstation before  
you close SANsurfer Switch Manager and read it later with a text  
editor or browser.  
Events generated by the switch, are stored on switch, and will be  
retrieved when the application is restarted. Some alarms are  
3-12  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
A
3.4.2.1  
Filtering the Event Browser  
Filtering the Event Browser enables you to display only those events that are of  
interest based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, and description. To  
filter the Event Browser, open the Filter menu and select Filter Entries. This  
opens the Filter Events dialog shown in Figure 3-4. The Event Browser displays  
those events that meet all of the criteria in the Filter Events dialog. If the filtering  
criteria is cleared or changed, then all the events that were previously hidden that  
satisfy the new criteria will be shown.  
You can filter the event browser in the following ways:  
Severity – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes to display  
alarm events, critical events, warning events, or informative events.  
Date/Time – Check one or both of the From: and To: check boxes. Enter the  
bounding timestamps (MM/dd/yy hh:mm:ss aa) to display only those events  
that fall within those times. ("aa" indicates AM or PM.) The current year (yy)  
can be entered as either 2 or 4 digits. For example, 12/12/06 will be  
interpreted December 12, 2006.  
Text – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes and enter a text  
string (case sensitive) for event source, type, and description. The Event  
Browser displays only those events that satisfy all of the search  
specifications for the Source, Type, and Description text.  
Figure 3-4. Filter Events Dialog  
59226-00 B  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
S
3.4.2.2  
Sorting the Event Browser  
Sorting the Event Browser enables you to display the events in alphanumeric  
order based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, or description. Initially,  
the Event Browser is sorted in ascending order by timestamp. To sort the Event  
Browser, click the Severity, Timestamp, Source, Type, or Description column  
buttons. You can also open the Sort menu and select By Severity, By  
Timestamp, By Source, By Type, or By Description. Successive sort  
operations of the same type alternate between ascending and descending order.  
3.4.2.3  
Saving the Event Browser to a File  
You can save the displayed Event Browser entries to a file. Filtering affects the  
save operation, because only displayed events are saved. To save the Event  
Browser to a file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Filter and sort the Event Browser to obtain the desired display.  
Open the File menu and select Save As.  
Select a folder and enter a file name in which to save the event log and click  
the Save button. The file can be saved in XML, CSV, or text format. XML  
files can be opened with an internet browser or text editor. CSV files can be  
opened with most spreadsheet applications.  
3-14  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
A
3.4.3  
Devices Data Window  
The Devices data window displays information about devices (hosts and storage  
targets) connected to the switch. Click the Devices tab below the data window to  
display device information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric.  
To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches, select one  
or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. Table 3-3 describes the  
entries in the Devices data window. Refer to “Exporting Device Information to a  
File” on page 3-18 for exporting device information.  
Table 3-3. Devices Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Port WWN  
Description  
Port world wide name  
Nickname  
Device port nickname. To create a new nickname or edit an  
existing nickname, double-click the cell and enter a nickname  
in the Edit Nickname dialog. Refer to “Managing Device Port  
Nicknames” on page 3-18 for more information.  
Details  
Click the (i) to display additional detail about the device. Refer  
FC Address  
Switch  
Fibre Channel address  
Switch name  
Port  
Switch port number  
Target/Initiator  
Vendor  
Device type: target or initiator  
Host Bus Adapter/Device Vendor  
Name of host  
Host Name  
Active Zones  
Row #  
The active zone to which the device belongs  
Number of port as displayed in the faceplate display  
59226-00 B  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
S
3.4.4  
Active Zone Set Data Window  
The Active Zoneset data window displays the zone membership for the active  
zone set that resides on the fabric management switch. The active zone set is the  
same on all switches in the fabric – you can confirm this by adding a fabric  
through another switch and comparing Active Zone Set displays.  
To open the Active Zoneset data window, click the Active Zoneset tab below the  
data window in the topology display. Refer to “Configured Zonesets Data Window”  
on page 4-12 for information about the zone set definitions on a particular switch.  
Refer to “Zoning a Fabric” on page 3-20 for more information about zone sets and  
zones.  
The Active Zoneset data window, shown in Figure 3-5, uses display conventions  
for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry  
handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be  
expanded. Click this handle or double-click the following entries:  
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its member ports/devices.  
Ports/devices that are zoned by WWN or FC address, but no longer part of  
the fabric, are grayed-out.  
Active Zoneset  
Data Window  
Figure 3-5. Active Zone Set Data Window  
3-16  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
A
3.4.5  
Link Data Window  
The Link data window displays information about all switch links in the fabric or  
selected links. This information includes the switch name, the port number at the  
end of each link, and the link status icons. To open the Link data window, click the  
Link tab below the data window in the topology display.  
3.5  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
SANsurfer Switch Manager enables you to do the following:  
3.5.1  
Displaying Detailed Device Information  
In addition to the information that is available in the Devices data window, you can  
click the (i) in the Details column to display more information as shown in  
Figure 3-6. Detailed Devices Display Dialog  
59226-00 B  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
S
3.5.2  
Exporting Device Information to a File  
To save device information to a file, open the topology display and do the  
following:  
1.  
Select one or more switches. If no switches are selected, Devices  
information is gathered for all switches.  
Open the Switch menu and select Export Devices Information.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Save button.  
3.5.3  
Managing Device Port Nicknames  
You can assign a nickname to a device port World Wide Name. A nickname is a  
user-definable, meaningful name that can be used in place of the World Wide  
Name. Assigning a nickname makes it easier to recognize device ports when  
zoning your fabric or when viewing the Devices data window.  
SANsurfer Switch Manager maintains nicknames in Nicknames.xml, which is  
found in your working directory. In addition to creating, editing, and deleting  
nicknames, you can also export the nicknames to a file, which can then be  
imported into the Nicknames.xml file on other workstations.  
3.5.3.1  
Creating a Nickname  
To create a device port nickname, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Choose one of the following methods to enter a nickname. A nickname must  
start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters. Valid characters include  
alphanumeric characters [aA-zZ][0-9] and special symbols [$ _ - ^ ].  
Click on a device in the table. Open the Edit menu and select Create  
Nickname to open the Add Nickname dialog. In the Add Nickname  
dialog, enter a nickname and WWN and click the OK button.  
Double-click a cell in the Nicknames column, and enter a new  
nickname in the text field. Click the Save button to save the changes  
and exit the Nicknames dialog.  
You can also create a nickname by double clicking a cell in the Nickname column  
of the Devices data window. Refer to “Devices Data Window” on page 3-15.  
3-18  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Working with Device Information and Nicknames  
A
3.5.3.2  
Editing a Nickname  
A nickname must start with a letter and can have up to 64 characters. Valid  
characters include alphanumeric characters [aA-zZ][0-9] and special symbols  
[$ _ - ^ ]. You can access the Edit Nicknames dialog two ways. Choose one of the  
following methods to edit a nickname:  
In the topology or faceplate display, open the File menu and select  
Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog. The device entries are listed in  
table format.  
Click on a device entry in the table. Open the Edit menu and select  
Edit Nickname to open the Edit Nicknames dialog. Edit the nickname  
in the text field. Click the OK button to save the changes.  
Double-click a cell in the Nicknames or WWN columns, and edit the  
nickname in the text field. Click the OK button to save the changes.  
In the topology or faceplate display, click the Devices tab to display the  
Devices data window. Double-click a cell in the Nickname column to open  
the Edit Nickname dialog. Edit the nickname in the text field. Click the OK  
button to save the changes. Refer to “Devices Data Window” on page 3-15  
for more information.  
3.5.3.3  
Deleting a Nickname  
To delete a device port nickname, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Click a device in the table. Open the Edit menu and select Delete  
Nickname.  
3.  
Click the Save button to save the changes.  
3.5.3.4  
Exporting Nicknames to a File  
You can save nicknames to a file. This is useful for distributing nicknames to other  
management workstations. To save nicknames to an XML file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Open the File menu in the Nicknames dialog, and select Export.  
Enter a name for the XML nickname file in the Save dialog and click Save.  
59226-00 B  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.5.3.5  
Importing a Nicknames File  
Importing a nicknames file copies its contents into and replaces the contents of  
the Nicknames.xml file which is used by SANsurfer Switch Manager. To import a  
nickname file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the File menu and select Nicknames to open the Nicknames dialog.  
Open the File menu in the Nicknames dialog, and select Import.  
Select an XML nickname file in the Open dialog and click Open. When  
prompted to overwrite existing nicknames, click Yes.  
3.6  
Zoning a Fabric  
Zoning enables you to divide the ports and devices of the fabric into zones for  
more efficient and secure communication among functionally grouped nodes. This  
subsection addresses the following topics:  
3.6.1  
Zoning Concepts  
The following zoning concepts provide some context for the zoning tasks  
described in this section:  
3-20  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.1.1  
Zones  
A zone is a named group of ports or devices that can communicate with each  
other. Devices within a zone can only communicate with other devices in the same  
zone. A device may participate in more than one zone.  
Membership in a zone can be defined by switch domain ID and port number,  
device Fibre Channel address (FCID), or device World Wide Name (WWN).  
WWN entries define zone membership by the World Wide Name of the  
attached device. With this membership method, you can move WWN  
member devices to different switch ports in different zones without having to  
edit the member entry as you would with a domain ID/port number member.  
Furthermore, unlike FCID members, WWN zone members are not affected  
by changes in the fabric that could change the Fibre Channel address of an  
attached device.  
FCID entries define zone membership by the Fibre Channel address of the  
attached device. With this membership method you can replace a device on  
the same port without having to edit the member entry as you would with a  
WWN member.  
Domain ID/Port number entries define zone membership by switch domain  
ID and port number. All devices attached to the specified port become  
members of the zone. The specified port must be an F_Port or an FL_Port.  
The SANbox 1400 Series switch supports soft zones and Access Control List  
(ACL) hard zones.  
3.6.1.1.1  
Soft Zones  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery. Devices within  
the same soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other  
members of the same zone. The soft zone boundary is not secure; traffic across  
soft zones can occur if addressed correctly. The following rules apply to soft  
zones:  
Soft zones that include members from multiple switches need not include  
the ports of the inter-switch links.  
Soft zones can overlap; that is, a device can participate in more than one  
soft zone.  
Do not create a soft zone that shares membership with a hard zone. Soft  
zone members that are in the hard zone will not be able to transfer I/O with  
soft zone members that are outside of the hard zone.  
Zone membership can be defined by Fibre Channel address, domain ID and  
port number, World Wide Name, or a combination.  
Soft zoning supports all port types.  
59226-00 B  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.1.1.2  
Access Control List Hard Zones  
Access Control List (ACL) zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling  
discovery and inbound traffic. ACL zoning is a type of hard zoning that is  
hardware enforced. This type of zoning is useful for controlling access to certain  
devices without totally isolating them from the fabric. Devices can communicate  
with each other and transmit outside the ACL zone, but cannot receive inbound  
traffic from outside the zone. The following rules apply to hard zones:  
ACL zones can overlap; that is, a port can be a member of more than one  
ACL zone.  
Do not create a hard zone that shares membership with a soft zone. Soft  
zone members that are in the hard zone will not be able to transfer I/O with  
soft zone members that are outside of the hard zone.  
ACL zones that include members from multiple switches need not include  
the ports of the inter-switch links.  
Membership can be defined only by domain ID and port number. Members  
defined by other methods will revert to soft zones.  
ACL zoning supports all port types.  
3.6.1.2  
Aliases  
To make it easier to add a group of ports or devices to one or more zones, you can  
create an alias. An alias is a named set of ports or devices that are grouped  
together for convenience. Unlike zones, aliases impose no communication  
restrictions between its members. You can add an alias to one or more zones. You  
cannot add a zone to an alias, nor can an alias be a member of another alias.  
3.6.1.3  
Zone Sets  
A zone set is a named group of zones. A zone can be a member of more than one  
zone set. Each switch in the fabric maintains its own zoning database containing  
one or more zone sets. This zoning database resides in non-volatile or permanent  
memory and is therefore retained after a reset. Refer to “Configured Zonesets  
Data Window” on page 4-12 for information about displaying the zoning database.  
The orphan zone set is created by the application automatically to hold the zones  
which are not in any set. The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not  
saved on the switch.  
To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a  
zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to  
every switch in the fabric. Refer to “Active Zone Set Data Window” on page 3-16  
for information about displaying the active zone set.  
3-22  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.1.4  
Zoning Database  
Each switch has its own zoning database. The zoning database is made up of all  
aliases, zones, and zone sets that have been created on the switch or received  
from other switches. The switch maintains two copies of the inactive zoning  
database: one copy is maintained in temporary memory for editing purposes; the  
second copy is maintained in permanent memory. Zoning database edits are  
made on an individual switch basis and are not propagated to other switches in  
the fabric when saved.  
There are two configuration parameters that affect the zoning database: Interop  
Auto Save and Default Visibility. The Interop Auto Save parameter determines  
whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from another switch  
in the fabric will be saved to permanent memory on that switch. The Default  
Visibility parameter permits or prohibits communication among ports/devices  
when there is no active zone set. Refer to “Configuring the Zoning Database” on  
page 3-28 for information about zoning configuration.  
The following zoning limits are enforced during the configuration of zoning and  
during a zoning database merge from the fabric:  
MaxZoneSets is 256. The maximum number of zone sets that can be  
configured on the switch.  
MaxZones is 2000. The maximum number of zones that can be configured  
on the switch.  
MaxAliases is 2500. The maximum number of aliases that can be  
configured on the switch.  
MaxTotalMembers is 10,000. The maximum number of total zone and alias  
members that can be configured on the switch. Aliases are considered zone  
members since they can be added to a zone just like a normal zone  
member.  
MaxZonesInZoneSets is 2000. The maximum number of zone linkages to  
zonesets that can be configured on the switch. Every time a zone is added  
to a zoneset this constitutes a linkage.  
MaxMembersPerZone is 2000. The maximum number of zone members  
that can be added to any zone on the switch. Aliases are considered zone  
members when added to a zone.  
MaxMembersPerAlias is 2000. The maximum number of zone members  
that can be added to any alias on the switch.  
59226-00 B  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.2  
Using the Zoning Wizard  
The Zoning Wizard is a series of dialogs that leads you through the process of  
zoning a fabric. To open the Zoning Wizard, open the Wizards menu in the  
faceplate display, and select Zoning Wizard.  
The Zoning Wizard helps you with the two most typical reasons for zoning:  
Zoning Windows servers storage  
Assign storage to servers.  
To solve these problems, there must be at least one target and at least one  
initiator in the name server. Windows servers do not share devices well, but  
sometimes they must share devices, such as a tape drive. The wizard helps you  
define which devices are sharable and which ones are not. Once a device is in a  
Windows group, it can no longer be in any other group.  
3.6.3  
Managing the Zoning Database  
Managing the zoning database consists of the following:  
3-24  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.3.1  
Editing the Zoning Database  
To edit the zoning database for a particular switch, open the Zoning menu from  
the faceplate display and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning dialog  
shown in Figure 3-7. Changes can only be made to inactive zone sets, which are  
stored in flash (non-volatile) memory and retained after resetting a switch.  
Port/Device  
Tree  
Zone Sets  
Tree  
Figure 3-7. Edit Zoning Dialog  
To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a  
zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to  
every switch in the fabric. This zone set is known as the active zone set.  
You cannot edit an active zone set on a switch. You must configure an inactive  
zone set to your needs and then activate that updated zone set to apply the  
changes to the fabric. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that  
zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric. However,  
in addition to the merged active zone set, each switch maintains its own original  
zone set in its zoning database. Only one zone set can be active at one time.  
59226-00 B  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
NOTE:  
If the Interop Auto Save parameter is enabled on the Zoning  
Configuration dialog, then every time the active zone set changes, the  
switch will copy it into an inactive zone set stored on the switch. You  
can edit this copy of the active zone set stored on the switch, and  
activate the updated copy to conveniently apply the changes to the  
active zone set. The edited copy then becomes the active zone set.  
The Edit Zoning dialog has a Zone Sets tree on the left and a Port/Device (or  
members) tree on the right. Both trees use display conventions similar to the  
fabric tree for expanding and contracting zone sets, zones, and ports. An  
expanded port shows the port Fibre Channel address; an expanded address  
shows the port World Wide Name. You can select zone sets, zones, and ports in  
the following ways:  
Click a zone, zone set, or port icon.  
Right-click to select a zone set or zone, and open the corresponding popup  
menu.  
Hold down the Shift key while clicking several consecutive icons.  
Hold down the Control key while clicking several non-consecutive icons.  
Use the Edit Zoning dialog to define zoning changes, and click the Apply button  
to open the Error Check dialog. Click the Error Check button to have SANsurfer  
Switch Manager check for zoning conflicts, such as empty zones, aliases, or zone  
sets, and ACL zones with non-domain ID/port number membership. Click the  
Save Zoning button to implement the changes. Click the Close button to close  
the Error Check dialog. On the Edit Zoning dialog, click the Close button to close  
the Edit Zoning dialog.  
Using tool bar buttons, popup menus, or a drag-and-drop method, you can create  
and manage zone sets and zones in the zoning database. Table 3-4 describes the  
zoning tool bar operations.  
3-26  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
Table 3-4. Edit Zoning Dialog Tool Bar Buttons and Icons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Create Zone Set button - create a new zone set  
Create Zone button - create a new zone  
Create Alias button - create another name for a set of objects  
Add Member button - adds selected port/device to a zone  
Remove Member button - delete the selected zone from a zone  
set, or delete the selected port/device from a zone  
Switch port icon – not logged in  
Switch port icon – logged in  
NL_Port (loop) device icon – logged in to fabric  
NL_Port (loop) device icon – not logged in to fabric  
N_Port device icon – logged in to fabric  
N_Port device icon – not logged in to fabric  
59226-00 B  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.3.2  
Configuring the Zoning Database  
Use the Zoning Config dialog to change the Auto Save, Default Visibility, and  
Discard Inactive configuration parameters. In the faceplate display, open the  
Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning Config to open the Zoning Config dialog  
shown in Figure 3-8. After making changes, click the OK button to put the new  
values into effect.  
Figure 3-8. Zoning Config Dialog  
3.6.3.2.1  
Interop Auto Save  
The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone  
set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to the  
zoning database on that switch. Changes are saved when an updated zone set is  
activated. Zoning changes are always saved to temporary memory. However, if  
Interop Auto Save is enabled, the switch firmware saves changes to the active  
zone set in temporary memory and to the zoning database. If Interop Auto Save is  
disabled, changes to the active zone set are stored only in temporary memory  
which is cleared when the switch is reset.  
NOTE:  
Disabling the Interop Auto Save parameter can be useful to prevent  
the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with  
different zoning schemes. However, leaving the Interop Auto Save  
parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch  
have to be reset. For this reason, the Interop Auto Save parameter  
should be enabled in a production environment.  
3-28  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.3.2.2  
Default Visibility  
Default visibility determines the level of communication that is permitted among  
ports/devices when there is no active zone set. The default visibility parameter  
can be set differently on each switch. When default visibility is enabled (ALL) on a  
switch, all ports/devices on the switch can communicate with all ports/devices on  
switches that also have default visibility enabled. When Default Visibility is  
disabled (NONE), none of the ports/devices on that switch can communicate with  
any other port/device in the fabric.  
3.6.3.2.3  
Discard Inactive  
The Discard Inactive parameter automatically removes inactive zones and zone  
sets when a zone set is activated or deactivated from a remote switch.  
3.6.3.3  
Saving the Zoning Database to a File  
You can save the zoning database to an XML file. You can later reload this zoning  
database on the same switch or another switch. To save a zoning database to a  
file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, open the File menu and select Save As.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name for the database file.  
Click the Save button to save the zoning file.  
3.6.3.4  
Restoring the Zoning Database from a File  
CAUTION!  
Restoring the zoning database from a file will replace the current  
zoning database on the switch.  
Do the following to restore the zoning database from a file to a switch:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning window.  
Open the File menu and select Open File. A popup window will prompt you  
to select an XML zoning database file.  
Select a file and click Open.  
59226-00 B  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.3.5  
Restoring the Default Zoning Database  
Restoring the default zoning clears the switch of all zoning definitions.  
CAUTION! This command will deactivate the active zone set.  
To restore the default zoning for a switch:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Restore Default  
Zoning.  
2.  
Click the OK button to confirm that you want to restore default zoning and  
save changes to the zoning database.  
3.6.3.6  
Removing All Zoning Definitions  
To clear all zone and zone set definitions from the zoning database, choose one of  
the following:  
Open the Edit menu and select Clear Zoning. In the Removes All dialog,  
click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all zones and zone  
sets.  
Right-click the Zone Sets heading at the top of the Zone Sets tree, and  
select Clear Zoning from the popup menu. Click the Yes button to confirm  
that you want to delete all zone sets and zones.  
3-30  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.4  
Managing Zone Sets  
Zoning a fabric involves creating a zone set, creating zones as zone set members,  
then adding devices as zone members. The zoning database supports multiple  
zone sets to serve the different security and access needs of your storage area  
network, but only one zone set can be active at one time. Managing zone sets  
consists of the following tasks:  
NOTE:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.6.4.1  
Creating a Zone Set  
To create a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Zone Set to open the Create Zone  
Set dialog.  
Enter a name for the zone set, and click the OK button. The new zone set  
name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone set name must begin with  
a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z,  
a-z, _, -, ^, and $.  
4.  
To create new zones in a zone set, do one of the following:  
Right-click a zone set and select Create A Zone from the popup menu.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and click  
the OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets  
dialog.  
Copy an existing zone by dragging a zone into the new zone set. Refer  
5.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
59226-00 B  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.4.2  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set  
You must activate a zone set to apply its zoning definitions to the fabric. Only one  
zone set can be active at one time. When you activate a zone set, the switch  
distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the  
fabric.  
The purpose of the deactivate function is to suspend all fabric zoning which  
results in free communication fabric wide or no communication depending on the  
default visibility setting. Refer to “Default Visibility” on page 3-29 for more  
information. It is not necessary to deactivate the active zone set before activating  
a new one.  
To activate a zone set, open the Zoning menu and select Activate Zone Set  
to open the Activate Zone Set dialog. Select a zone set from the Select Zone  
Set pull-down menu, and click the Activate button.  
To deactivate the active zone set, open the Zoning menu, select Deactivate  
Zone Set. Acknowledge the warning about traffic disruption, and click the  
Yes button to confirm that you want to deactivate the active zone set.  
3.6.4.3  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set  
To copy an existing zone and its membership from one zone set to another, select  
the zone and drag it to the chosen zone set. Click the Apply button to save  
changes to the zoning database.  
3.6.4.4  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets  
You can remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database.  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
2.  
3.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone(s) to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone from the zone  
set, or select Remove from All Zones to remove the zone from all zone  
sets.  
4.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone from a zone set or  
from all zone sets in the database.  
3-32  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.4.5  
Removing a Zone Set  
Removing a zone set from the database affects the member zones in the following  
ways.  
Member zones that are members of other zone sets are not affected.  
Member zones that are not members of other zone sets become members  
of the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not  
saved on the switch.  
To delete a zone set from the database, do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone set to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone set.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone set from the  
database.  
3.6.5  
Managing Zones  
Managing zones involves the following:  
NOTE:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
59226-00 B  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.5.1  
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set  
When a zone is created, its zone type is soft. To change the zone type to a hard  
zone, refer to “Changing Zone Types” on page 3-37 for more information. Refer to  
“Zones” on page 3-21 for information on zone types (soft and hard). To create a  
zone in a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select a zone set.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create a Zone.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and click the  
OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone  
name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid  
characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, ^, $, and -.  
NOTE:  
If you enter the name of a zone that already exists in the  
database, the SANsurfer Switch Manager application will ask if  
you would like to add that zone and its membership to the zone  
set.  
5.  
To add switch ports or attached devices to the zone, do one of the following:  
In the zone set tree, select the zone set. In the graphic window, select  
the port to add to the zone. Open the Edit menu and select Add  
Members.  
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide  
Name in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.  
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide  
Name in the Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and select Add  
Zone Members from the popup menu.  
6.  
Click the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
3-34  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.5.2  
Adding Zone Members  
You can zone a port/device by switch domain ID and port number, device port  
Fibre Channel address, or the device port WWN. Adding a port/device to a zone  
affects every zone set in which that zone is a member. To add ports/devices to a  
zone, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following methods to add the port/device:  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.  
To select multiple ports/devices, press and hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select a zone set  
in the left pane. Open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select a zone set  
in the left pane. Click the Insert button.  
If the port/device you want to add is not in the Port/Device tree, you can add  
it by doing the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Right click the selected zone.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create Members.  
Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or First Port Address radio button.  
Enter the hexadecimal value for the port/device according to the radio  
button selection: 16 digits for a WWN member, 4 digits for a Domain/  
Port member (DDPP), or a 6-digit Fibre Channel Address for a First  
Port Address member (DDPPAA) where D=domain ID, P=port number,  
and A=ALPA.  
3.  
Click the OK button to add the member and save the change.  
NOTE:  
Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch  
domain IDs. These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use  
domain ID/port number pair to define their membership. Be sure to  
reconfigure zones that are affected by a domain ID change.  
59226-00 B  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.5.3  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set  
To rename a zone, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree of the Edit Zoning dialog, click the zone/zone set to be  
renamed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Rename.  
In the Rename Zone/Rename Zone Set dialog, enter a new name for the  
zone/zone set.  
4.  
Click the OK button.  
3.6.5.4  
Removing a Zone Member  
Removing a zone member will affect every zone and zone set in which that zone  
is a member. To remove a member from a zone:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone member to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3.6.5.5  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set  
The orphan zone set is created by the application automatically to hold the zones  
which are not in any set. The orphan zone set cannot be removed and is not  
saved on the switch. To remove a zone from a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone to be removed. The selected zone  
will be removed from that zone set only.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3.6.5.6  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets  
To remove a zone from all zone sets, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning dialog, select the zone to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove Zone from All Sets.  
Click the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning dialog.  
3-36  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.5.7  
Changing Zone Types  
To change a zone type, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the faceplate display, select the switch with the zone type to change.  
Click the Zoning button to open the Edit Zoning dialog.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone to change.  
Open the Edit menu and select Set Zone Type to open the Set Zone Type  
dialog.  
5.  
Open the Zone Type pull-down menu and select Soft or ACL.  
Soft zoning is the least restrictive type of zoning.  
ACL zoning is hard zoning and is enforced by hardware and defines  
access to a given port. ACL zones need not include inter-switch links.  
3.6.6  
Managing Aliases  
An alias is a collection of objects that can be zoned together. An alias is not a  
zone, and cannot have a zone or another alias as a member.  
NOTE:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
You will not see aliases in the active zone set.  
3.6.6.1  
Creating an Alias  
To create an alias, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Alias to open the Create Alias  
dialog.  
Enter a name for the alias, and click the OK button. The alias name is  
displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. An alias name must begin with a letter  
and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the alias name to the zoning database.  
59226-00 B  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.6.2  
Adding a Member to an Alias  
You can add a port/device to an alias by domain ID and port number, device port  
Fibre Channel address, or the device port WWN. To add ports/devices to an alias,  
do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
dialog.  
2.  
Choose one of the following methods to add the port/device:  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the alias.  
To select multiple ports/devices, press and hold the Control key while  
selecting.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. Click an alias to select  
multiple ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select an  
alias. Open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
Select a port/device in the Port/Device tree. To select multiple  
ports/devices, press the Control key while selecting. Select an alias.  
Click the Insert button.  
If the port/device you want to add is not in the Port/Device tree, you can add  
it by doing the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Right click the selected alias.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create Members.  
Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or First Port Address radio button.  
Enter the hexadecimal value for the port/device according to the radio  
button selection: 16 digits for a WWN member, 4 digits for a Domain/  
Port member (DDPP), or a 6-digit Fibre Channel Address for a First  
Port Address member (DDPPAA) where D=domain ID, P=port number,  
and A=ALPA.  
3.  
Click the OK button to add the member and save the change.  
3.6.6.3  
Removing an Alias from All Zones  
To remove an alias from all zones, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree in the Edit Zoning dialog, select the alias to be  
removed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove Alias from All Zones.  
Click the Yes button in the Remove dialog.  
3-38  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
A
3.6.7  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning  
If you join two fabrics with an inter-switch link, the active zone sets from the two  
fabrics attempt to merge automatically. The fabrics may consist of a single switch  
or many switches already connected together. The switches in the two fabrics  
attempt to create a new active zone set containing the union of each fabric's  
active zone set. The propagation of zoning information only affects the active zone  
set, not the configured zone sets, unless Interop Auto Save is turned on.  
3.6.7.1  
Zone Merge Failure  
If a zone merge is unsuccessful, the inter-switch links between the fabrics will  
isolate due to a zone merge failure, which will generate an alarm. The reason for  
the E_Port isolation can also be determined by viewing the port information. Refer  
page A-62 (Port keyword).  
A zone merge will fail if the two active zone sets have member zones with  
identical names that differ in membership or type. For example, consider Fabric A  
and Fabric B each with a soft zone named “ZN1” in its active zone set. Fabric A  
"ZN1" contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 1; Fabric B “ZN1”  
contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 2. In this case, the merge  
will fail because the two zones have the same name, but different membership.  
59226-00 B  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
S
3.6.7.2  
Zone Merge Failure Recovery  
When a zone merge failure occurs, the conflict that caused the failure must be  
resolved. You can correct a failure due to a zone conflict by deactivating one of  
the active zone sets or by editing the conflicting zones so that their membership is  
the same. You can deactivate the active zone set on one fabric if the active zone  
set on the other fabric accurately defines your zoning needs. If not, you must edit  
the zone memberships, and reactivate the zone sets. After correcting the zone  
membership, reset the isolated ports to allow the fabrics to join.  
NOTE:  
If you deactivate the active zone set in one fabric and the Interop Auto  
Save parameter is enabled, the active zone set from the second fabric  
will propagate to the first fabric and replace all zones with matching  
names in the configured zone sets.  
If the zone sets to merge have the same Zone A that only differ in the  
type of zone (soft vs. ACL), the zone sets will merge. If this is a 2  
switch fabric, Switch 1 will state that Zone A is soft and Switch 2 will  
state that Zone A is ACL.  
Refer to “Managing Zones” on page 3-33 for information about adding and  
removing zone members. Refer to “Resetting a Port” on page 5-16 for information  
about resetting a port.  
3-40  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 4  
Managing Switches  
This section describes the following tasks that manage switches in the fabric.  
59226-00 B  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
S
4.1  
Managing User Accounts  
Only the Admin account can manage user accounts with the User Account  
Administration dialogs. However, any user can modify their own password. To  
open the User Account Administration dialogs, open the Switch menu in the  
faceplate display, and select User Accounts.... A user account consists of the  
following:  
Account name or login  
Password  
Authority level  
Expiration date  
Switches come from the factory with the following user accounts:  
Table 4-1. Factory User Accounts  
Account Name  
Password  
Admin Authority  
Expiration  
admin  
images  
admin  
images  
true  
false  
never expires  
never expires  
The Admin account is the only user that can manage all user accounts with the  
User Account Administration dialogs. The Admin account can create, remove, or  
modify user accounts, and change account passwords. The Admin account can  
also view and modify the switch and its configuration with SANsurfer Switch  
Manager. The Admin account can not be removed.  
Users with Admin authority can view and modify the switch and its configuration  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager. Users without Admin authority are limited to  
viewing switch status and configuration.  
The Images is used to exchange files with the switch using FTP. The Image  
account cannot be removed.  
4-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
A
4.1.1  
Creating User Accounts  
To create a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... This displays the User Account  
Administration dialog shown in Figure 4-1. A switch can have a maximum of 15  
user accounts.  
Figure 4-1. User Account Administration Dialog – Add Account  
1.  
To open the User Account Administration dialogs, open the Switch menu in  
the faceplate display, and select User Accounts....  
2.  
3.  
Click the Add Account tab to open the Add Account tab page.  
Enter an account name in the New Account Login field. Account names are  
limited to 15 characters.  
4.  
5.  
If the account is to have the ability to modify switch configurations, check the  
Admin Authority Enabled box.  
Enter a password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Verify  
Password field. A password must have a minimum of 8 characters and no  
more than 20.  
6.  
7.  
If this account is to be permanent with no expiration date, click the  
Permanent Account radio button. Otherwise, click the Account Will  
Expire button and enter the number days in which the account will expire.  
Click the Add Account button to add the newly defined account.  
59226-00 B  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
S
4.1.2  
Removing a User Account  
To remove a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... Click the Remove Account tab in the dialog  
to present the display shown in Figure 4-2. Select the account (login) name from  
the list of accounts at the top of the dialog and click the Remove Account button.  
Figure 4-2. User Account Administration Dialog – Remove Account  
4-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
A
4.1.3  
Changing a User Account Password  
To change the password for an account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the  
faceplate display and select User Accounts.... Click the Change Password tab  
in the dialog to present the display shown in Figure 4-3. Select the account (login)  
name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog, then enter the old  
password, the new password, and verify the new password in the corresponding  
fields. Click the Change Password button. Any user can change their password  
for their account, but only the Admin account name can change the password for  
another user’s account. If the administrator does not know the user’s original  
password, the administrator must remove the account and add the account.  
Figure 4-3. User Account Administration Dialog – Change Password  
59226-00 B  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
S
4.1.4  
Modifying a User Account  
To modify a user account on a switch, open the Switch menu in the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... This displays the User Account  
Administration dialog shown in Figure 4-4. Click the Modify Account tab. Select  
the account (login) name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog. Click the  
Admin authority Enabled check box to grant admin authority to the account name.  
Click an Account Expiration Date radio button. If the account is not to be  
permanent, enter the number of days until the account expires. Click the Modify  
Account button to save the changes. Click the Close button to close the User  
Account Administration dialog.  
Figure 4-4. User Account Administration Dialog - Modify Account  
4-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
A
4.2  
Displaying Switch Information  
The faceplate display and data windows provide the following switch information:  
Device and HBA information  
Switch specifications and addresses  
Configuration parameters  
Port performance statistics  
Port information  
Configured zone sets  
Figure 4-5 shows the faceplate display for the SANbox 1400 Series switch.  
Figure 4-5. Faceplate Display - Switch Information  
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the switch status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
switch status in the display, do one of the following:  
Click the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
Right-click a switch in the topology display and select Refresh Switch from  
the popup menu.  
Right-click in the graphic window of the faceplate display, and select  
Refresh Switch from the popup menu.  
59226-00 B  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
S
4.2.1  
Devices Data Window  
The Devices data window displays information about devices (hosts and storage  
targets) connected to the switch. Click the Devices tab below the data window to  
display name server information for all devices that are logged into the selected  
fabric. To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches,  
select one or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. Refer to  
“Devices Data Window” on page 3-15 for a description of the entries in the  
Devices data window.  
4.2.2  
Switch Data Window  
The Switch data window displays current network and switch information for the  
selected switches. Refer to “Configuring a Switch” on page 4-17 for more  
information about the Switch data window. To open the Switch data window, select  
one or more switches in the topology display, or open the faceplate display, and  
click the Switch tab below the data window. Table 4-2 describes the Switch data  
window entries.  
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Switch Type  
Description  
Switch model  
First Port Address  
World Wide Name  
Serial Number  
Reason for Status  
User Name  
Switch Fibre Channel address  
Switch World Wide Name  
Number assigned to each chassis.  
Additional status information  
Account name  
Login Level  
Authority level  
Super User  
Super user privileges enabled/disabled  
User Authentication  
Enabled  
Enforcement of account names and authority (always  
True)  
Vendor  
Switch manufacturer  
Firmware Version  
Inactive Firmware Version  
Active firmware version  
This field does not apply to this switch  
Pending Firmware Version Firmware version that will be activated at the next reset  
PROM/Boot Version PROM boot version  
4-8  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
A
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
MAC Address  
Description  
Media Access Control address  
IP Address  
Internet Protocol address  
Subnet Mask  
Mask that determines the IP address subnet  
Gateway address  
Gateway  
SNMP Enabled  
Negotiated Domain ID  
Configured Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
SNMP enabled or disabled.  
The domain ID currently being used by the fabric  
The domain ID defined by network administrator  
Domain ID lock status. Prevents (True) or permits (False)  
dynamic domain ID reassignment.  
Number of Ports  
Number of ports activated on the switch.  
Switch operational state: Online, Offline, Diagnostic  
Current switch administrative state  
Operational State  
Administrative State  
Configured Admin State  
Switch administrative state that is stored in the switch  
configuration  
R_A_TOV  
E_D_TOV  
Interop Mode  
Resource allocation timeout value  
Error detect timeout value  
Zoning merge status. If True, changes to the active zone  
set are propagated throughout the fabric. If false, changes  
to both the active zone set and zoning database are prop-  
agated throughout the fabric. Refer to the QLogic Switch  
Interoperability Guide found on the QLogic Web site.  
Legacy Address Format  
Interop Auto Save  
Legacy port addressing status. Enabled only for interoper-  
ability with non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches.  
Zoning auto save status. Saves zoning updates in tempo-  
rary memory and the zoning database (True) or only in  
temporary memory (False).  
Zoning Default Visibility  
Zoning visibility status. Permits (All) or prevents (None)  
communication between attached devices in the absence  
of an active zone set.  
Default Zone  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
Security Auto Save  
59226-00 B  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
S
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Security Fabric Binding  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
Enable  
Temperature  
Internal switch temperature °C  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
Power supply 1 status  
Fan 1 Status  
Fan 2 Status  
Fan 3 Status  
Power Supply 1 Status  
Power Supply 2 Status  
Beacon Status  
Broadcast Support  
N/A - does not apply to this switch  
Beacon status. Switch LEDs are blinking (On) or not (off).  
Broadcast support status. Broadcast support is enabled or  
disabled (default).  
In-band Enabled  
In-band management status. Permits (True) or prevents  
(False) a switch from being managed over an ISL.  
Temperature Failure Port  
Shutdown  
Non-configurable (always enabled for this switch). All  
ports are downed when the switch temperature exceeds  
the Failure Temperature.  
Warning Temperature  
Failure Temperature  
NTP Client Enabled  
NTP Server Address  
Non-configurable temperature threshold (65° Celsius)  
above which a warning condition alarm is generated.  
Non-configurable temperature threshold (70° Celsius)  
above which a failure condition alarm is generated.  
Enabled or disabled. Allows for switches to synchronize  
their time a centralized server.  
The IP address of the centralized NTP server. Ethernet  
connection to NTP server is required.  
FDMI Enabled  
This field does not apply to this switch.  
This field does not apply to this switch.  
FDMI HBA Entry Limit  
Number of Donor Groups  
Total number of donor port groups. A donor group is a set  
of ports on a switch that can donate buffer credits to each  
other.  
Embedded GUI Enabled  
SANsurfer Switch Manager web applet status.  
4-10  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
A
Table 4-2. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Inactivity Timeout  
Number of minutes the switch waits before terminating an  
idle command line interface session. Zero (0) disables the  
time out threshold.  
GUI Mgmt Enabled  
Telnet Enabled  
SSH Enabled  
CIM Enabled  
SANsurfer Switch Manager service status  
Telnet service status  
Secure Shell service status  
Common Information Module service status  
File Transfer Protocol service status  
Management Server service status  
FTP Enabled  
Management Server  
Enabled  
4.2.3  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays port performance data for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Stats tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 5-6 for a description of the  
Port Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to  
open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to view  
the total count of statistics since the last switch reset. Select Rate to view the  
number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select Baseline  
to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set. Click  
the Clear Baseline button to set the current baseline.  
4.2.4  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Info tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 5-6 for a description of the  
Port Information data window entries.  
59226-00 B  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
S
4.2.5  
Configured Zonesets Data Window  
The Configured Zonesets data window displays all zone sets, zones, aliases, and  
zone membership in the zoning database, shown in Figure 4-6. To open the  
Configured Zonesets data window, click the Configured Zonesets tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. To view the active zone set in the Active  
Zonesets data window, open the topology display and click the Active Zonesets  
data window tab.  
The Configured Zonesets data window uses display conventions for expanding  
and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry handle located  
to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click  
this handle or double-click the following entries to expand or collapse them:  
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its members by device port World Wide  
Name, or device port Fibre Channel address.  
The alias entry expands to show its entries.  
Figure 4-6. Configured Zonesets Data Window  
4-12  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms  
A
4.3  
Configuring Port Threshold Alarms  
You can configure the switch to generate alarms for selected events. Configuring  
an alarm involves choosing an event type, rising and falling triggers, a sample  
window, and finally enabling or disabling the alarm. To configure port threshold  
alarms, do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Port Threshold  
Alarm Configuration. The Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog  
shown in Figure 4-7 prompts you to enable or disable all alarms, select an  
event, set triggers, set a sample window and enable or disable an individual  
alarm.  
Figure 4-7. Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Dialog  
2.  
Check the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box to enable  
monitoring for all the individual alarm types that are enabled. The Enable All  
Port Threshold Alarms check box is the master control for the individual  
alarms. For example, the switch will monitor CRC errors only if both the  
CRC Error Monitoring box and the Enable All Port Threshold Alarms  
check box are checked.  
3.  
Select an event type from the Port Threshold Alarm pull-down menu.  
Choose from the following options:  
CRC error monitoring  
Decode error monitoring  
ISL monitoring  
Login monitoring  
Logout monitoring  
Loss of signal monitoring  
4.  
Check the Enable box to make the alarm eligible for use.  
59226-00 B  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 – Managing Switches  
Paging a Switch  
S
5.  
6.  
Enter a value for the rising trigger. A rising trigger alarm is generated when  
the event count per interval exceeds the rising trigger. The switch will not  
generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends  
below the falling trigger and rises again above the rising trigger. Consider  
the example in Figure 4-8.  
Enter a value for the falling trigger. A falling trigger alarm is generated when  
the event count per interval descends below the falling trigger.  
NOTE:  
The switch will down a port if a rising trigger alarm is not cleared  
after three consecutive sample windows.  
Generate rising  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Generate rising  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Rising  
Trigger  
Event  
Count  
Falling  
Trigger  
Generate falling  
trigger alarm;  
eligibility is reset  
Sample Window  
Figure 4-8. Port Threshold Alarm Example  
7.  
Enter a sample window in seconds. The sample window defines the period  
of time in which to count events.  
8.  
9.  
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each alarm you want to configure or enable.  
Click the OK button to save all changes.  
4.4  
Paging a Switch  
You can use the beacon feature to page a switch. The beacon feature causes all  
Logged-In LEDs to flash, making it easier to recognize. To page a switch, open  
the Switch menu in the faceplate display and enable the Toggle Beacon  
selection. To cancel the beacon, reselect Toggle Beacon.  
4-14  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client  
A
4.5  
Setting the Date/Time and Enabling NTP Client  
The Date/Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) dialog enables you to manually  
set the date and time on a switch, or to enable the NTP Client to synchronize the  
date and time on the switch with an NTP server. Enabling the NTP client ensures  
the consistency of date and time stamps in alarms and log entries. An Ethernet  
connection to an NTP server is required. When date/time is set or displayed in the  
firmware, it is always in Universal Time, However, when displayed in the  
Date/Time dialog, the value is always in local time. The difference between switch  
and workstation times must not exceed 24 hours, or the switch management  
application can not connect.  
To set the date and time on a switch, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select a switch in the topology display, and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu, and select Set Date/Time....  
Choose one of the following:  
Enter the year, month, day, time, and time zone in the Switch  
Date/Time dialog, then click OK. The new date and time take effect  
immediately.  
Click the NTP Client Enabled checkbox to enable the switch to  
synchronize its time with an NTP server. Enter the IP address of the  
NTP server. Ethernet connection to NTP server is required. Click the  
OK button to save the settings.  
4.6  
Resetting a Switch  
Resetting a switch reboots the switch using configuration parameters in memory.  
Depending on the reset type, a switch reset may or may not include a power-on  
self test or it may or may not disrupt traffic. Table 4-2 describes the types of switch  
resets.  
During a hot reset operation, fabric services will be unavailable for a short period  
(30-75 seconds depending on switch model). Verify all administrative changes to  
the fabric (if any) are complete before performing an Non-Disruptive Code Load  
and Activation (NDCLA). When upgrading firmware across a fabric using  
non-disruptive activation, upgrade one switch at a time and allow 75 seconds  
between switches.  
CAUTION!  
Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process.  
59226-00 B  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Resetting a Switch  
S
Common administrative operations that change the fabric include:  
Zoning modifications  
Adding, moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric. This  
includes powering up or powering down attached devices.  
Adding, moving or removing ISLs or other connections.  
Management Interfaces:  
After an NDCLA operation is complete, management connections must be  
re-initiated:  
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re-connect automatically  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
Applicable Code Versions:  
Future switch code releases will be upgraded non-disruptively unless  
specifically indicated in its associated release notes  
An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported.  
Table 4-3. Switch Resets  
Type  
Hot Reset  
Description  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware, but does not disrupt switch traffic. If errors  
are detected on a port during a hot reset, the port is reset automat-  
ically.  
Reset without  
POST  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.  
Hard Reset  
Resets a switch with a power-on self test. This reset activates the  
pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.  
To reset a switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select the switch to be reset and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu and select the Reset Switch pull-down menu:  
Select Hot Reset to perform a hot reset.  
Select Reset to perform a standard reset.  
Select Hard Reset to perform a hard reset.  
4-16  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7  
Configuring a Switch  
Switch configuration is divided into three areas: chassis configuration, network  
configuration, and SNMP configuration. Chassis configuration specifies  
switch-wide Fibre Channel settings. Network configuration specifies IP settings,  
remote logging, and the NTP client. SNMP configuration specifies SNMP settings  
and traps.  
You can configure a switch explicitly or you can use the Configuration Wizard. The  
Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs that guide you through the chassis,  
network, and SNMP configuration steps on new or replacement switches.  
Configuring a switch involves the following tools and properties:  
4.7.1  
Using the Configuration Wizard  
The Configuration Wizard is a series of dialogs you can use to configure the IP  
address and other basic parameters on new or replacement switches. SANsurfer  
Switch Manager will detect the first time use and present the Initial Start dialog,  
from which the Configuration Wizard can be launched. You can also launch the  
Configuration Wizard from the Wizards menu in either the topology display or the  
faceplate display. Open the Wizards menu and select Configuration Wizard. Use  
the Configuration Wizard to configure a new switch in a fabric.  
59226-00 B  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.2  
Switch Properties  
To open the Switch Properties dialog, either select a switch in the topology display  
or open the faceplate display for the switch you be configuring, and then open the  
Switch menu and select Switch Properties. You may also right-click a switch  
graphic in the topology display or faceplate display, and select Switch Properties  
from the popup menu.  
Use the Switch Properties dialog to change the following switch configuration  
parameters:  
Figure 4-9. Switch Properties Dialog  
4.7.2.1  
Symbolic Name  
The symbolic name is a user-defined name of up to 32 characters that identifies  
the switch. The symbolic name is used in the topology and faceplate displays, as  
well as many data windows to more easily identify switches. The illegal characters  
are the pound sign (#), semi-colon (;), and comma (,).  
4-18  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7.2.2  
Switch Administrative States  
The switch administrative state determines the operational state of the switch. The  
switch administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state  
and the current administrative state.  
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state. The  
configured administrative state is displayed in the Switch Properties dialog.  
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the switch for  
temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Switch command. Refer to the “Set  
Table 4-4 describes the administrative state values.  
Table 4-4. Switch Administrative States  
Parameter  
Online  
Description  
The switch is available.  
Offline  
The switch is unavailable.  
Diagnostics  
The switch is in diagnostics mode, is unavailable, and tests can  
then be run on all ports of the switch.  
59226-00 B  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.2.3  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock  
The domain ID is a unique Fibre Channel identifier for the switch. The Fibre  
Channel address consists of the domain ID, port ID, and the Arbitrated Loop  
Physical Address (ALPA). The maximum number of switches within a fabric is 239  
with each switch having a unique domain ID.  
Switches come from the factory with the domain IDs unlocked. This means that if  
there is a domain ID conflict in the fabric, the switch with the highest principal  
priority, or the principal switch, will reassign any domain ID conflicts and establish  
the fabric. If you lock the domain ID on a switch and a domain ID conflict occurs,  
one of the switches will isolate as a separate fabric and the Logged-In LEDs on  
both switches will flash to show the affected ports. Refer to the “Set Config  
Command” on page A-40 for information about the Switch keyword and the  
Domain ID Lock and Principal Priority parameters.  
If you connect a new switch to an existing fabric with its domain ID unlocked, and  
a domain conflict occurs, the new switch will isolate as a separate fabric.  
However, you can remedy this by resetting the new switch or taking it offline then  
back online. The principal switch will reassign the domain ID and the switch will  
join the fabric.  
NOTE:  
Domain ID reassignment is not reflected in zoning that is defined by  
domain ID and port number pair. You must reconfigure zones that are  
affected by domain ID reassignment.  
4.7.2.4  
Fabric Device Management Interface  
Fabric Device Management Interface (FDMI) provides a means to gather and  
display device information from the fabric, and allows FDMI capable devices to  
register certain information with the fabric, if FDMI is enabled. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager will report any and all FDMI information reported by the entry switch, if  
FDMI is enabled on the entry switch. To view FDMI data, FDMI must be enabled  
on the entry switch and on all other switches in the fabric which are to report FDMI  
data.  
FDMI is comprised of the fabric-to-device interface and the application-to-fabric  
interface. The fabric-to-device interface enables a device’s management  
information to be registered. The application-to-fabric interface provides the  
framework by which an application obtains device information from the fabric. Use  
the FDMI HBA Entry Limit field on the Switch Properties dialog to configure the  
maximum number of HBAs that can be registered with a switch. If the number of  
HBAs exceeds the maximum number, the FDMI information for those HBAs can  
not be registered.  
4-20  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
Use the FDMI Enabled radio button on the Switch Properties dialog to enable or  
disable FDMI. If FDMI is enabled on an HBA, the HBA forwards information about  
itself to the switch when the HBA logs into the switch. If FDMI is enabled on a  
switch, the switch stores the HBA information in its FDMI database. Disabling  
FDMI on a switch clears the FDMI database. If you disable FDMI on a switch, then  
re-enable it, you must reset the ports to cause the HBAs to log in again, and thus  
forward HBA information to the switch.  
To view detailed FDMI information for a device, open the topology display, click  
the Devices tab, and click the Information (i) button in the Details column of the  
Devices data window. The Detailed Devices Display dialog displays the specific  
information for that device. Refer to “Devices Data Window” on page 3-15 for  
more information.  
4.7.2.5  
Broadcast Support  
Broadcast is supported on the switch and allows for TCP/IP support. Broadcast is  
implemented using the proposed standard specified in Multi-Switch Broadcast for  
FC-SW-3, T11 Presentation Number T11/02-031v0. Fabric Shortest Path First  
(FSPF) is used to set up a fabric spanning tree used in transmission of broadcast  
frames. Broadcast frames are retransmitted on all ISLs indicated in the spanning  
tree and all online N_Ports and NL_Ports. Broadcast zoning is supported with  
Access Control List (ACL) hard zones. When a broadcast frame is received, these  
hard zones are enforced at the N_Ports and NL_Ports. If the originator of the  
broadcast is in a hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on all online N_Ports and  
NL_Ports within the hard zone. If the originator of the broadcast frame is not in a  
hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on online N_Ports and NL_Ports that are not  
in a hard zone. The default setting is disabled.  
4.7.2.6  
In-band Management  
In-band management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANsurfer Switch Manager, SNMP, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with in-band  
management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection.  
59226-00 B  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.3  
Advanced Switch Properties  
The Advanced Switch Properties dialog enables you to set timeout values, Interop  
Mode, and Legacy Address Format settings. The Advanced Switch Properties  
dialog is available for only the entry switch, because an in-band switch can not be  
taken offline. The switch will automatically be taken offline temporarily and will be  
restored to its original state after the changes are completed. To open the  
Advanced Switch Properties dialog, open the Switch menu and select Advanced  
Switch Properties. After making changes, click the OK button to put the new  
values into effect.  
Use the Advanced Switch Properties dialog, show in Figure 4-10, to change the  
following switch configuration parameters:  
Figure 4-10. Advanced Switch Properties Dialog  
4-22  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7.3.1  
Timeout Values  
The switch timeout values determine the timeout values for all ports on the switch.  
Table 4-5 describes the switch timeout parameters. The timeout values must be  
the same for all switches in the fabric.  
NOTE:  
Mismatched timeout values will disrupt the fabric. These should not be  
changed unless absolutely necessary. Therefore, the switch must be  
offline to change these values. Use the Switch Properties dialog to take  
the switch offline.  
Table 4-5. Timeout Values  
Parameter  
Description  
R_A_TOV  
Resource Allocation Timeout: Represents the maximum time a frame  
could be delayed in the Fabric and still be delivered. The default is  
10000 milliseconds.  
E_D_TOV  
Error Detect Timeout: Represents the maximum round trip time that  
an operation between two N_Ports could require. The default is 2000  
milliseconds.  
59226-00 B  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.3.2  
Interop Mode for Zoning  
When a zone set is activated on an FC-SW-2 compliant switch, only the active  
zone set is propagated to all switches in the fabric. When a zone set is activated  
on a non-FC-SW-2 compliant switch, the active zone set and all inactive zone sets  
(the entire zoning database stored in permanent memory) are propagated to all  
switches in the fabric. Use the Standard option for FC-SW-2 compliant switches to  
propagate only the active zone set to all switches in the fabric. Use the Interop_1  
parameter for non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches to propagate the active zone set  
and all inactive zone sets to all switches in the fabric.  
NOTE:  
The Interop Mode setting must be the same on all switches in the  
fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
4.7.3.3  
Legacy Port Address Format  
Legacy Address Format should be enabled only to permit interoperation with  
certain older non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches. Enabling this setting under other  
circumstances will disable zoning that is defined by domain ID and port number.  
This Legacy Address Format option is available only when the Interop_1 setting  
is enabled on the Advanced Switch Properties dialog. Contact your authorized  
maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature. Refer to the QLogic  
Switch Interoperability Guide on the QLogic Web site for a complete discussion of  
configuring for operation with non-Qlogic switches.  
NOTE:  
The Legacy Address Format setting must be the same on all  
switches in the fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
4-24  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7.4  
Network Properties  
Use the Network Properties dialog shown in Figure 4-11 to change IP  
configuration parameters and enable remote logging. After making changes, click  
the OK button to put the new values into effect. To open the Network Properties  
dialog, select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display, open  
the Switch menu and select Network Properties.  
Figure 4-11. Network Properties Dialog  
59226-00 B  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.4.1  
IP Configuration  
The IP configuration identifies the switch on the Ethernet network and determines  
which network discovery method to use. Table 4-6 describes the IP configuration  
parameters.  
Table 4-6. IP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Network Discov- Choose one of the following methods by which to assign the IP  
ery  
address:  
Static - Uses the IP configuration parameters entered in the  
Switch Properties dialog.  
BootP - Acquires the IP configuration from a BootP server.  
RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
address from an RARP server. An RARP request is broadcast  
with up to three retries, each at 5 second intervals. If no IP  
address is obtained, the switch reverts to the previously config-  
ured IP address.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
configuration from a DHCP server. If no satisfactory lease is  
obtained, the DHCP client attempts to use the previously config-  
ured lease. If the previous lease cannot be used, no IP address  
will be assigned to this switch in order to avoid an IP address  
conflict. The DHCP server must then be made available.  
If a BootP, RARP, or DHCP server is not available, the switch will  
attempt to use a previously assigned valid lease. If no lease was  
ever assigned, the switch will attempt to use the previously assigned  
static IP address.  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
Gateway  
Internet Protocol (IP) address for the Ethernet port. The default value  
is 10.0.0.1.  
Subnet mask address for the Ethernet port. The default value is  
255.0.0.0.  
IP gateway address. The default value is 10.0.0.254.  
4-26  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7.4.2  
Remote Logging  
The Remote Logging (syslog) feature enables saving of the log information to a  
remote host that supports the syslog protocol. When enabled, the log entries are  
sent to the syslog host at the IP address that you specify in the Logging Host IP  
Address field. Log entries are saved in the internal switch log whether this feature  
is enabled or not.  
To save log information to a remote host, you must edit the syslog.conf file  
(located on the remote host) and then restart the syslog daemon. Consult your  
operating system documentation for information on how to configure Remote  
Logging. The syslog.conf file on the remote host must contain an entry that  
specifies the name of the log file in which to save error messages. Add the  
following line to the syslog.conf file. A <tab> separates the selector field  
(local0.info) and action field which contains the log file path name  
(/var/adm/messages/messages.name).  
local0.info <tab> /var/adm/messages.name  
4.7.4.3  
NTP Client  
The NTP Client feature allows switches to synchronize their date and time with a  
centralized server. NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in  
alarms and log entries. An Ethernet connection to NTP server is required. Refer to  
information.  
59226-00 B  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.5  
SNMP Properties  
Use the SNMP Properties dialog shown in Figure 4-12 to change SNMP  
configuration parameters. After making changes, click the OK button to put the  
new values into effect. To open the SNMP Properties dialog, select a switch in the  
topology display or open the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select  
SNMP Properties.  
NOTE:  
Since Read Community, Trap Community, and Write Community  
settings are like passwords, they are write-only fields; the current  
settings are not displayed.  
Figure 4-12. SNMP Properties Dialog  
4-28  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
A
4.7.5.1  
SNMP Configuration  
The SNMP configuration defines how authentication traps are managed.Table 4-7  
describes the SNMP configuration parameters. The illegal characters for the  
user-defined fields are the pound sign (#), semi-colon (;), and comma (,).  
Table 4-7. SNMP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SNMP Enabled Enables or disables SNMP communication with other switches in the  
fabric.  
Contact  
Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) of the person who is to be  
contacted to respond to trap events. The default is “undefined”.  
Read Commu-  
nity  
Read community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to read information from the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “public”.  
Trap Community Trap community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on  
the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same.  
The default is “public”.  
SNMP Proxy  
If enabled, you can use SNMP to monitor and configure any switch in  
the fabric.  
Location  
Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) for the switch location. The  
default is “undefined”.  
Authentication  
Trap  
Enables or disables the reporting of SNMP authentication failures. If  
enabled, a notification trap is sent when incorrect community string  
values are used. The default value is "False".  
Write Commu-  
nity  
Write community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to write information to the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “private”.  
59226-00 B  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
S
4.7.5.2  
SNMP Trap Configuration  
The SNMP trap configuration defines how traps are set. Choose from the tabs  
Trap1 Trap 5 to configure each trap. Table 4-8 describes the SNMP  
configuration parameters.  
Table 4-8. SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Trap Version  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) with which to format traps.  
Enables or disables the trap. If disabled, traps are not configurable.  
Trap 1 Enabled  
Trap Address1  
Specifies the IP address to which SNMP traps are sent. A maximum  
of 5 trap addresses are supported. The default address for trap 1 is  
10.0.0.254. The default address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0.  
Trap Port1  
The port number on which the trap is sent. The default is 162.  
Trap Severity  
Specifies a severity level to assign to the trap. Open the pull-down  
menu and choose a level. The Trap 1 Enabled check box on the  
SNMP Properties dialog must be enabled to access this pull-down  
menu. Trap severity levels include Unknown, Emergency, Alert, Criti-  
cal, Error, Warning, Notify, Info, Debug, and Mark  
1Trap address (other than 0.0.0.0) and trap port combinations must be unique. For example, if trap 1 and trap  
2 have the same address, then they must have different port values. Similarly, if trap 1 and 2 have the same  
port value, they must have different addresses.  
4-30  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Archiving a Switch  
A
4.8  
Archiving a Switch  
You can create an .XML archive file containing the configuration parameters.  
Basically any data received by SANsurfer Switch Manager is archived. However,  
passwords are not archived with the user account information. Archived  
parameters include the following:  
Switch properties and statistics  
IP configuration  
SNMP configuration  
Port properties and statistics  
Alarm configuration  
Zoning configuration  
This archive file can be used to restore the configuration on the same switch or on  
a replacement switch. You can also use the archive file as a template for  
configuring new switches to add to a fabric. Security settings and user account  
information are not archived. The archive can be used later to restore the switch.  
Refer to “Restoring a Switch” on page 4-32 for more information.  
To archive a switch, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Archive.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name.  
Click the Save button.  
59226-00 B  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
S
4.9  
Restoring a Switch  
Restoring a switch loads the archived switch configuration parameters to the  
switch. The switch configuration must be archived before it can be restored. The  
switch archive must be compatible with the switch to be restored; that is, you can  
restore a SANbox 1400 Series switch only with an archive from a SANbox 1400  
Series switch. Refer to “Archiving a Switch” on page 4-31 for more information.  
CAUTION!  
The switch being restored should be physically disconnected from  
the fabric. Restoring a switch in a fabric can severely disrupt the  
fabric. After the restore process is complete, the switch can be  
reconnected to the fabric.  
To restore a switch, do the following:  
1.  
Log in to the fabric through the switch you want to restore. You cannot  
restore a switch over an ISL.  
2.  
Open the Switch menu in the faceplate display and select Restore to display  
the Restore dialog shown in Figure 4-13. The Restore dialog offers a Full  
Restore and a Selective Restore tab.  
Figure 4-13. Restore Dialogs – Full and Selective  
4-32  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
A
3.  
4.  
Enter the archive file name or browse for the file. This archive file must be  
one that was produced by the SANsurfer Switch Manager Archive function.  
Configuration backup files created with the Config Backup command are not  
compatible with the SANsurfer Switch Manager Restore function.  
To restore all configuration settings, click the Full Restore tab, then click the  
Restore button. To restore selected configuration settings, click the  
Selective Restore tab and check one or more of the following boxes, then  
click the Restore button:  
Network Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Network  
properties dialog except the IP address. Refer to “Network Properties”  
IP Address: Restores switch IP address in addition to the other  
network properties.  
Switch Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Switch  
properties dialog except the domain ID. Refer to “Switch Properties” on  
Domain ID: Restores switch domain ID in addition to the other switch  
properties.  
Port Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Port properties  
Configured Zoning: Restores all zone sets, zones, and aliases in the  
switch’s zoning database excluding the active zone set.  
5.  
6.  
If you select the Configured Zoning or Full Restore option and the file  
contains zone sets, a dialog prompts you to activate one of those zone sets.  
Click the Yes button, and select a zone set from the drop-down menu in the  
Select Zone Set to be Activated dialog.  
Click the OK button and view the results in the top pane of the Restore  
dialog.  
59226-00 B  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
S
4.10  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
You can restore the switch and port configuration settings to the factory default  
values. To restore the factory configuration on a switch, open the Switch menu  
and select Restore Factory Defaults. Table 4-9 lists the factory default switch  
configuration settings.  
Restoring the switch to the factory default configuration does not restore the  
account name and password settings. To restore user accounts, you must select  
the Reset Password File option in the maintenance menu. Refer to “Recovering  
a Switch” in the Installation Guide for your switch for information about  
maintenance mode and the maintenance menu.  
Table 4-9. Factory Default Configuration Settings  
Setting  
Value  
Symbolic Name  
SANbox  
Online  
1
Administrative State  
Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
False  
True  
In-band Management  
Broadcast Support  
Resource Allocation Timeout (R_A_TOV)  
Interop Mode  
Enable  
10000 milliseconds  
True  
I/O Stream Guard  
Device Scan Enabled  
Error Detect Timeout (E_D_TOV)  
SNMP Enabled  
Disabled  
True  
2000 milliseconds  
True  
SNMP Proxy  
True  
IP Address  
10.0.0.1  
True  
FDMI Enabled  
FDMI HBA Entry Level  
Subnet Mask Address  
Gateway Address  
Network Discovery  
1000  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
Static  
4-34  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Downloading a Support File  
A
Table 4-9. Factory Default Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Setting  
Value  
Remote Logging  
False  
Remote Logging Host Ip Address  
NTP Client Enabled  
NTP Server IP Address  
Contact  
10.0.0.254  
False  
10.0.0.254  
Undefined  
Undefined  
False  
Location  
Trap Enabled  
Trap Port  
162  
Trap Address  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2-5: 0.0.0.0  
Trap Community  
Read Community  
Write Community  
Port State  
Public  
Public  
Private  
Online  
Auto-detect  
GL  
Port Speed  
Port Type  
4.11  
Downloading a Support File  
The Download Support File option assembles all log files and switch memory data  
into a core dump file (dump_support.tgz). This file can be sent to technical support  
personnel for troubleshooting switch problems. The menu option is not accessible  
for switches that do not support the download support file function.  
To create a support file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
On the faceplate display, open the Switch menu, and select Download  
Support File.  
In the Download Support File dialog, click the Browse button to define a  
location for the support file or type the path in the text field.  
Click the Start button to begin the process of creating and downloading the  
support file to your workstation. Observe the status in the Status area.  
After the support file is saved to your workstation, click the Close button to  
close the Download Support File dialog.  
59226-00 B  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Installing Firmware  
S
4.12  
Installing Firmware  
Installing firmware involves loading, unpacking, and activating the firmware image  
on the switch. SANsurfer Switch Manager does this in one operation. To provide  
consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches are running  
the same version of firmware.  
The pending firmware version will differ from the active version during the brief  
period while the switch is resetting to activate the firmware. Firmware  
management tools enable you to install and activate new firmware.  
During a hotreset operation, fabric services will be unavailable for a short period  
(30-75 seconds depending on switch model). To ensure that an NDCLA operation  
is successful, verify that all administrative changes to the fabric (if any) are  
complete. When you need to do NDCLA/hotreset to multiple switches, only  
perform the NDCLA/hotreset on one switch at a time, and allow a 75 second wait  
before performing the NDCLA/hotreset operation on the next switch.  
CAUTION!  
Changes to the fabric may disrupt the NDCLA process.  
Common administrative operations that change the fabric include:  
Zoning modifications  
Adding, moving or removing devices attached to the switch fabric. This  
includes powering up or powering down attached devices.  
Adding, moving or removing ISLs or other connections.  
Management Interfaces:  
After an NDCLA operation is complete, management connections must be  
re-initiated:  
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions will re-connect automatically  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
Applicable Code Versions:  
Future switch code releases will be upgraded non-disruptively unless  
specifically indicated in its associated release notes  
An NDCLA operation to previous switch code releases is not supported.  
4-36  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Hardware Status  
A
To install firmware, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Load Firmware.  
In the Firmware Upload dialog, click the Browse button to browse and select  
the firmware file to be uploaded.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Start button to begin the firmware load process. You will be shown  
a message warning you that the switch will be reset in order to activate the  
firmware.  
SANsurfer Switch Manager prompts you to activate the new firmware using  
a hot (non-disruptive) reset, if possible. Click the OK button to reset the  
switch and activate the new firmware.  
4.13  
Displaying Hardware Status  
To display a summary of the hardware status information in a popup text box, rest  
the cursor over the chassis LED cluster in the faceplate display.  
Input Power LED – indicates the voltage status of the switch.  
Heartbeat LED – indicates the status of the internal switch processor and  
the results of the Power On Self Test.  
System Fault LED – indicates an over temperature condition or a Power On  
Self Test (POST) error.  
Figure 4-14. Hardware Status LEDs  
59226-00 B  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Hardware Status  
S
Notes  
4-38  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Managing Ports  
This section describes the following tasks that manage ports and devices:  
5.1  
Displaying Port Information  
Port information is available primarily in the faceplate display shown in Figure 5-1.  
The faceplate display data windows provide information and statistics for switches  
and ports. Use the topology display to view status information on fabrics,  
switches, and links between switches.  
Figure 5-1. Faceplate Display – Port Information  
59226-00 B  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
S
5.1.1  
Monitoring Port Status  
The faceplate display provides the following port related information:  
Port type  
Port operational state  
Port speed  
Port media  
To display port number and status information for a port, position the cursor over a  
port on the faceplate display. The status information changes depending on the  
View menu option selected.  
5.1.1.1  
Displaying Port Types  
To display port type status, from the faceplate display, open the View menu, and  
select View Port Types. Table 5-1 lists the possible port types and their  
meanings.  
Table 5-1. Port Types  
State  
F_Port  
Description  
Fabric port - Supports a single public device (N_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
G_Port  
Generic port - Self discovers as an F_Port or an E_Port.  
GL_Port  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
E_Port  
Donor  
Expansion port - The mode that a G_Port or GL_Port is in when attached  
by an ISL (inter-switch link) to another fibre channel switch. The SANbox  
1400 Series switch supports one ISL.  
Donor port - Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.  
5-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
A
5.1.1.2  
Displaying Port Operational States  
To display the operational state on each port in the faceplate display, open the  
View menu and select View Port States. Table 5-2 lists the possible operational  
states and their meanings. The port operational state refers to actual port state  
and not the administrative state you may have assigned.  
Table 5-2. Port Operational States  
State  
Description  
On  
Ia  
Online – port is active and ready to send data.  
Inactive – port operational state is offline, but administrative state is  
online.  
Iso  
Off  
Isolated – E_Port has lost its connection. Refer to “Port Information  
Data Window” on page 5-7 for information about why the E_Port has  
isolated.  
Offline – port is active, can receive signal, but cannot accept a device  
login.  
Dia  
Dn  
Diagnostics – port is in diagnostics mode in preparation for testing  
Down – the port is disabled, power is removed from the lasers, and  
can’t be logged in.  
5.1.1.3  
Displaying Port Speeds  
To display the speed of each port in the faceplate display, open the View menu  
and select View Port Speeds. Table 5-3 lists the possible port speeds.  
Table 5-3. Port Speeds  
State  
Description  
Au  
Auto-detect  
1-Gbps  
2-Gbps  
4-Gbps  
1-Gbps transmission speed  
2-Gbps transmission speed  
4-Gbps transmission speed  
59226-00 B  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
S
5.1.1.4  
Displaying Transceiver Media Status  
To display transceiver media status, open the View menu and select View Port  
Media. Table 5-4 lists the port media states and their meanings.  
Table 5-4. Port Transceiver Media View  
Media Icon  
Description  
Optical SFP, Online (Green)  
Optical SFP, Offline (Gray)  
Copper SFP, Online (Green)  
Copper SFP, Offline (Gray)  
None  
Empty port, no transceiver installed  
5.1.2  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays statistics about port performance. To  
open the Port Statistics window, select one or more ports in the faceplate display  
and click the Port Stats tab below the data window. Table 5-5 describes the Port  
Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to  
open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to view  
the total count of statistics since the last switch or port reset. Select Rate to view  
the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select  
Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was  
set. When viewing baseline statistics, click the Clear Baseline button to set the  
current baseline. The baseline will also be set when the switch status changes  
from unreachable to reachable.  
5-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
A
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Start Time  
Description  
The beginning of the period over which the statistics apply. The  
start time for the Absolute view is not applicable. The start time  
for the Rate view is the beginning of polling interval. The start  
time for the Baseline view is the last time the baseline was set.  
End Time  
Total Time  
Al Init  
The last time the statistics were updated on the display.  
Total time period from start time to end time.  
Number of times the port entered the initialization state.  
AL Init Error  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the initial-  
ization failed. Increments count when port has a sync loss.  
Bad Frames  
Number of frames that were truncated due to a loss of sync or  
the frame didn't end with an EOF.  
Class 2 Frames In  
Class 2 Frames Out  
Class 2 Words In  
Class 2 Words Out  
Class 3 Frames In  
Class 3 Frames Out  
Class 3 Toss  
Number of class 2 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 2 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 2 words received by this port.  
Number of class 2 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames that were discarded by this port. A  
frame can be discarded because of detection of a missing  
frame (based on SEQ_CNT), detection of an E_D_TOV time-  
out, receiving a reject frame, or receiving a frame on an offline  
port.  
Class 3 Words In  
Class 3 Words Out  
Decode Errors  
Number of class 3 words received by this port.  
Number of class 3 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of invalid transmission words detected during decod-  
ing. Decoding is from the 10-bit characters and special K char-  
acters.  
Ep Connects  
FBusy  
Number of E_Port logins.  
Number of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames  
generated by this port in response to incoming frames. This  
usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_port that  
is preventing delivery of this frame.  
59226-00 B  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
S
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Flow Errors  
Number of times a frame is received and all the switch ports  
receive buffers are full. The normal Fabric Login exchange of  
flow control credit should prevent this from occurring. The  
frame will be discarded.  
FReject  
Number of frames, from devices, that have been rejected.  
Frames can be rejected for any of a large number of reasons.  
Invalid CRC  
Number of invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) frames  
detected.  
Invalid Destination  
Address  
Number of address identifier (S_ID, D_ID) errors. AL_PA  
equals non-zero AL_PA found on F_Port.  
Link Failures  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link fail-  
ure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while not in  
the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt  
to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established, a link  
failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link failure.  
LIP (AL_PD,AL_PS)  
LIP(f7,AL_PS)  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets,  
performed.  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_port, identified by  
AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is  
trying to restore the loop.  
LIP(f7,f7)  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire an AL_PA.  
LIP(f8,AL_PS)  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_port identi-  
fied by AL_PS.  
LIP(f8,f7)  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a Loop  
Failure has been detected at its receiver and does not have a  
valid AL_PA.  
Login Count  
Number of device logins that have occurred on the switch.  
Number of device logouts that have occurred on the switch.  
Number of loop timeouts.  
Logout Count  
Loop Timeouts  
Loss Of Sync  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
Primitive Sequence  
Errors  
Number of bad primitives received by the port.  
5-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
A
Table 5-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Rx Link Resets  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
Rx Offline Sequences Number of offline sequence primitives received by the port.  
Total Errors  
Total number of primitive and non-primitive port link errors.  
Total Link Resets  
Number of link-reset primitives transmitted and received by the  
port.  
Total LIPs Received  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received.  
Total LIPs Transmitted Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted.  
Tx Offline Sequences Number of offline primitives transmitted by the port.  
Total Rx Frames  
Total Rx Words  
Total Tx Frames  
Total Tx Words  
Tx Link Resets  
Total number of frames received by the port.  
Total number of words received by the port.  
Total number of frames transmitted by the port.  
Total number of words transmitted by the port.  
Number of link reset primitives sent from this port to an  
attached port.  
Total Offline  
Sequences  
Total number of offline sequences transmitted and received by  
the port.  
5.1.3  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays detail information for the selected port.  
To open the Port Information data window, click the Port Info tab below the data  
window in the faceplate display.  
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Port Address  
Port Fibre Channel address.  
59226-00 B  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
S
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Administrative Port Type  
The administrative port type (G, GL, F, FL,  
or Donor). This value is persistent; it will  
be maintained during a switch reset. Dur-  
ing port auto-configuration, it will be used  
to determine which operational port states  
are allowed.  
Operational Port Type  
The port type that is currently active. This  
will be set during port auto-configuration  
based on the administrative port type.  
Administrative Port State  
The port state (Online, Offline, Diagnos-  
tics, or Down) which has been set by the  
user. This state may be different from the  
configured administrative state if the user  
has not saved it in the switch configura-  
tion. This state is used at the time it is set  
to try to set the port operational state. This  
value is not persistent and will be lost on a  
switch reset.  
Operational Port State  
The port state that is currently active. This  
value may be different from the adminis-  
trative port state, for example due to an  
error condition.  
Configured Administrative Port State  
The port state (Online, Offline, Diagnos-  
tics, or Down) which is saved in the switch  
configuration, either by the user or at the  
factory. This value is persistent; it will be  
maintained during a switch reset, and will  
be used after a reset to set the port opera-  
tional state.  
Logged In  
Indicates whether logged in or not.  
E Port Connection Status  
E_Port connection status. Status can be  
None, Connecting, Connected or Isolated.  
E Port Isolation Reason  
MFS Mode  
Why E_Port is isolated.  
Multiple Frame Sequence bundling status.  
I/O Stream Guard  
RSCN message suppression status. Sta-  
tus can be enabled, disabled, or automati-  
cally determined by the switch.  
Administrative Port Speed  
The speed requested by the user.  
5-8  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
A
Table 5-6. Port Information Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Operational Port Speed  
Max Credits  
The speed actually being used by the port.  
The maximum number of credits granted  
to a port that can be used when extending  
port credits.  
Device Scan  
Device scan status. Enabled means the  
switch queries the connected device dur-  
ing login for FC-4 descriptor information.  
Symbolic Name  
Port symbolic name  
Ext Credits Requested  
Credits to Donate  
Number of requested credits  
The number of credits available to be  
donated by the selected port.  
Donor Group  
The donor group of the selected port.  
Valid Donor Groups  
The number of separate groups within  
which extended credits may be donated  
and assigned.  
Medium  
The transceiver type.  
Media  
The transceiver type.  
Media Speed  
Media Type  
The maximum transceiver speed  
The transceiver fibre type, such as single  
mode, multi-mode, copper.  
Media Transmitter  
Media Distance  
The transceiver transmitter type, such as  
longwave, shortwave, electrical.  
The maximum transceiver transmission  
distance  
Media Vendor  
The company that manufactured the SFP  
The IEEE registered company ID  
The part number assigned to the SFP  
Transceiver hardware version  
Media Vendor ID  
Media Part Number  
Media Revision  
59226-00 B  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
S
5.2  
Configuring Ports  
The port settings or characteristics are configured using the Port Properties  
dialogs shown in Figure 5-2. To open the corresponding type of Port Properties  
dialog, select one or more ports, open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Figure 5-2. Port Properties Dialog  
The Port Properties dialog displays the switch name and the selected ports. Use  
the Port Properties dialog to change the following parameters:  
Port state  
Port speed  
Port type  
I/O Stream Guard (RSCN Suppression)  
Device scan  
5-10  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
A
5.2.1  
Changing Port Administrative States  
The port administrative state determines the operational state of a port. The port  
administrative state has two forms: the configured administrative state and the  
current administrative state.  
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANsurfer Switch  
Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state.  
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the port for  
temporary purposes and is not preserved across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Port command. Refer to the “Set  
Table 5-7 describes the port administrative states. To change port administrative  
state, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Port States radio button that corresponds to the port state you  
want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port state to the switch.  
Table 5-7. Port Administrative States  
State  
Online  
Description  
Activates and prepares port to send data.  
Offline  
Prevents port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.  
Diagnostics  
Prepares port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a  
device login.  
Down  
Disables the port.  
59226-00 B  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
S
5.2.2  
Changing Port Speeds  
Ports are capable of transmitting and receiving at 1-Gbps or 2-Gbps. The ports  
can be configured for either transmission speed or to sense the transmission  
speed of the device to which it is connected. Table 5-8 describes the port speeds.  
To change the port speed, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Click the radio button that corresponds to the port speed you want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port speed to the switch.  
Table 5-8. Port Speeds  
State  
Description  
Auto-Detect  
Matches the transmission speed of the connected device. This is the  
default.  
1 Gbps  
2 Gbps  
4 Gbps  
Sets the transmission speed to 1 Gbps.  
Sets the transmission speed to 2 Gbps.  
Sets the transmission speed to 4 Gbps.  
5-12  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
A
5.2.3  
Changing Port Types  
The ports can be configured to self-discover the proper type to match the device  
or switch to which it is connected. Table 5-9 describes the port types.  
To change the port type, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Click the Port Type radio button for the port type you want.  
Click the OK button to write the new port type to the switch.  
Table 5-9. Port Types  
State  
F_Port  
Description  
Fabric port - Supports a single public device (N_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
G_Port  
Generic port - Self discovers as an F_Port or an E_Port.  
GL_Port  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
GL_Port  
Donor  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
Donor port - Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.  
59226-00 B  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
S
5.2.4  
I/O Stream Guard  
The I/O Stream Guard feature suppresses Registered State Change Notification  
(RSCN) messages on a port basis. I/O Stream Guard should be enabled only on  
ports connected to initiator devices. To configure the I/O Stream Guard option  
using the Port Properties dialog, open the Port menu, and select Port Properties.  
Click the radio button that corresponds to one of the following options:  
Enable: Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages from other ports for  
which I/O Stream Guard is enabled.  
Disable: Allows free transmission and reception of RSCN messages.  
Auto: Suppresses the reception of RSCN messages when the port is  
connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA. For older QLogic HBAs,  
such as the QLA2200, Device Scan must be enabled. The default is Auto.  
5.2.5  
Device Scan  
The Device Scan feature queries the connected device during login for FC-4  
descriptor information. Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict  
with the connected device.  
5.2.6  
Changing Port Symbolic Name  
To change the symbolic name of a port from the faceplate display, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the faceplate display and select a port.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Symbolic Name.  
In the Port Symbolic Name dialog, choose one of the following:  
Enter a new name for the port in the Set Port Symbolic Name field. The  
symbolic name can have up to 32 characters.  
Check the Restore Default Port Symbolic Name check box to restore  
the default name.  
4.  
Click the OK button.  
5-14  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing Ports  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard  
A
5.3  
Using the Extended Credits Wizard  
Each port is supported by a data-buffer with a 8-credit capacity; that is, 8  
maximum sized frames. For fiber optic cables, this enables full bandwidth service  
over a distance of 13 kilometers at 1 Gbps (0.6 credits per Km) or 6 kilometers at  
2 Gbps (1.2 credits per Km). Longer distances can be spanned at full bandwidth  
by borrowing credits from designated donor ports thus pooling the buffer  
capacities. This is called credit extension. Each donor port contributes 7 credits to  
the pool from which the recipient ports can draw. The recipient port also loses one  
credit in the process. For example, one donor port contributes 7 credits to the pool  
from which a recipient draws for a total of 14 credits (7+7). This provides  
approximately 23 Km at 1 Gbps (14÷0.6) or 11 Km at 2 Gbps (14÷1.2).  
To extend credits, open the Wizards menu and select Ext Credit Wizard. The  
Extended Credit Wizard leads you through the following process to extend credits  
based on transmission distance requirements:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Extended Distance: Explains the concepts and principles of extending port  
credits. Click the Next button.  
Extended Distance Requirements: Specify speed and distance requirements  
for each port then click Next.  
Designate Donor Ports: Select available ports and click >> to move the port  
into the Selected Donor Port column shown in Figure 5-3. Match the number  
of ports needed with the number of designated donor ports. Click the Next  
button.  
Figure 5-3. Designate Donor Ports  
59226-00 B  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Resetting a Port  
S
4.  
Verify Requested Changes: Review the extended distance requests and the  
selected donor ports. Click the Finish button to apply the changes, and  
redistribute the credits.  
NOTE:  
As credits are used, the Logged-In LEDs on the corresponding donor  
ports illuminate continuously. In addition, donor port Activity LEDs will  
reflect the same traffic as the recipient port. Donor ports whose credits  
are being used are unavailable to devices that are connected to them.  
5.4  
Resetting a Port  
The Reset Port option reinitializes the port using the saved configuration. To reset  
a port, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, select the port(s) to be reset.  
Open the Port menu and select Reset Port.  
5.5  
Testing Ports  
The port loopback tests verify correct port operation by sending a frame out  
through the loop, and then verifying that the frame received matches the frame  
that was sent. Only one port can be tested at a time for each type of test. The Port  
Loopback Test dialog shown in Figure 5-4 presents the following loopback tests:  
Figure 5-4. Port Loopback Test Dialog  
5-16  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing Ports  
Testing Ports  
A
SerDes level (Internal) - The SerDes level test verifies port circuitry. The  
SerDes level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip  
and back to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the  
frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received.  
This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore,  
disrupts communication.  
SFP level (External) - The SFP level test verifies port circuitry. The SFP  
level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip,  
through the SFP transceiver fitted with an external loopback plug, and back  
to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the test frame  
that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received. This  
test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore, disrupts  
communication.  
Node-to-Node (Online) - The Node-to-Node test verifies communications  
between the port and its device node or device loop. The port being tested  
must be online and connected to a remote device. The port passes the test if  
the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that was received.  
This test does not disrupt communication on the selected port. This test  
requires that the port be online, and therefore, does not disrupt  
communication.  
To run the internal, external, or online port loopback test on a port, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, select the port to be tested.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Loopback Test to open the Port  
Loopback Test dialog.  
3.  
4.  
In the Test Selection area, click the radio button for the type of loopback test  
to be run (Internal, External, or Online). If you choose the internal or external  
test, SANsurfer Switch Manager will prompt you to confirm that the port state  
needs to be changed to the diagnostic state. Click the OK button and  
SANsurfer Switch Manager will change the port state.  
Enter the frame count, frame size, and click a test pattern radio button. You  
may use the default pattern or enter an 8-digit pattern (hex). For online test,  
you can check the Terminate Test Upon Error check box if you want the  
test to stop should it encounter an error.  
5.  
6.  
Click the Start Test button to begin the test. The Test Results area displays  
the test status, number of frames sent, and number of errors found.  
To test another port, open the Select Port pull-down menu and select  
another port (number) and test type (Internal, External, or Online) in the Test  
Selection area.  
7.  
Click the Start Test button to begin the next test. Observe the results in the  
Test Results area.  
59226-00 B  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
5.6  
Graphing Port Performance  
SANsurfer Performance View application displays port performance using graphs.  
SANsurfer Performance View plots data communication rates and total errors for  
selected ports as shown in Figure 5-5. When graphing data communication rates,  
you can choose either frames/second or KB/second.  
On Solaris platforms, if you launch the SANsurfer Performance View application  
from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and SANsurfer Performance  
View can not connect to the fabric, (for example, if you have reached the  
maximum number of SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch),  
then SANsurfer Performance View opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the  
fabric tree.  
Fabric status is displayed in text format after the fabric name in the fabric tree. The  
color of the icon indicates the current connection status as normal (green),  
warning (yellow), critical (red), or unmanageable (blue).  
Figure 5-5. Performance View Graphs  
5-18  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
A
This section describes how to do the following:  
5.6.1  
Starting SANsurfer Performance View  
To start SANsurfer Performance View from within SANsurfer Switch Manager,  
open the topology display and select Start Performance View from the Fabric  
menu. When starting the SANsurfer Performance View application from the  
SANsurfer Switch Manager application on Linux and Solaris platforms, the fabric  
currently displayed in the SANsurfer Switch Manager topology display opens  
automatically in the SANsurfer Performance View topology display. On Windows  
platforms, you will need to manually open the fabric in the SANsurfer Performance  
View topology display.  
NOTE:  
On the Solaris platforms, if you launch the SANsurfer Performance  
View application from the SANsurfer Switch Manager application and  
SANsurfer Performance View can not connect to the fabric, (for  
example, if you have reached the maximum number of SANsurfer  
Switch Manager sessions on the entry switch), then SANsurfer  
Performance View opens with a blue fabric icon displayed in the fabric  
tree. The reason for status displayed after the fabric name in the fabric  
tree will indicate the reason for failure to connect.  
59226-00 B  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
5.6.2  
Exiting SANsurfer Performance View  
To exit a SANsurfer Performance View session, open the File menu and select  
Exit. The current fabric view is automatically saved to your default performance  
view file upon exit, if you have defined an encryption key. The key is encrypted  
and saved with your default performance view file. A performance view file  
contains the set of fabrics that have been added and the graphs that have been  
opened during a SANsurfer Performance View session. If you have not yet  
defined an encryption key, the Save Default Performance View File dialog, shown  
in Figure 5-6, prompts you to save the current performance view file as the default  
performance view file. Refer to “Changing the Default Performance View File  
Encryption Key” on page 5-22 for information about defining and changing this  
encryption key.  
In the Save Default Performance View File dialog, enter an encryption key in the  
Default Performance File Encryption Key field. Re-enter the encryption key in the  
Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm field. Click the OK button to save the current  
set of fabrics to the default performance view file in the working directory.  
To prevent SANsurfer Performance View from prompting you to save the default  
performance view file between sessions, set the Auto Load and Save Graphing  
Environment setting to Enable (default). Refer to “Setting SANsurfer Performance  
View Preferences” on page 5-22 for more information.  
Figure 5-6. Save Default Performance View File Dialog  
5-20  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
A
In your next SANsurfer Performance View session, the Load Default View File  
dialog shown in Figure 5-7 prompts you to load the default performance view file  
and to specify its encryption key, if there is one. In the Default Fabric File  
Encryption Key field, enter the encryption key and click the Load View File  
button. If you do not want to load the default performance view file, click the  
Continue Without Loading button to open the SANsurfer Performance View with  
no fabric displayed.  
Figure 5-7. Load Default View File Dialog  
5.6.3  
Saving and Opening Performance View Files  
In addition to the default performance view file, you can save and open your own  
performance view files. The performance view file contains the set of fabrics,  
graphs, and graphing options. To save a performance view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this fabric file, you will be  
prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field blank, no  
password is required.  
To open a performance view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
2.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or click the Browse button to select an  
existing file.  
59226-00 B  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
5.6.4  
Changing the Default Performance View File Encryption Key  
To change the encryption key for the default performance view file, do the  
following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Save Default Performance View File to  
open the Save Default Performance View File dialog.  
2.  
3.  
Enter the new encryption key in the Default File Encryption Key field.  
Re-enter the same encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm  
field.  
4.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
5.6.5  
Setting SANsurfer Performance View Preferences  
To set preferences, open the File menu and select Preferences to open the  
Preferences dialog shown in Figure 5-8. Set the following preferences and click  
the OK button to save the changes:  
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.  
Enable or disable the Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Options  
preference. When enabled, SANsurfer Performance View prompts you to  
save and load the default fabric file between sessions. Refer to “Exiting  
SANsurfer Performance View” on page 5-20 for more information on the  
default performance view file.  
Enable or disable prompting to confirm that you will accept a non-secure  
connection.  
Figure 5-8. Preferences – SANsurfer Performance View  
5-22  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
A
5.6.6  
Setting the Polling Frequency  
SANsurfer Performance Viewer updates the graphs once per second by default.  
To change this polling frequency, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Graph menu, and select Set Polling Frequency to open the Set  
Graph Polling Frequency dialog.  
2.  
Enter the new polling interval in seconds [1–60]. Performance Viewer will  
update the graphs once during the interval. For example, setting the polling  
frequency to 5 seconds will return 1 second’s worth of data every 5 seconds.  
3.  
Click the OK button to save the changes.  
5.6.7  
Displaying Graphs for a Switch  
To display graphs for a switch, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric or click the Add button. Enter  
a fabric name and an IP address in the Add a New Fabric dialog. Include an  
account name and a password if required.  
2.  
Set the graphing options and polling frequency. By default, SANsurfer  
Performance View plots total bytes transmitted and received at a polling  
frequency of once per second. Refer to “Customizing Graphs” on page 5-24  
for information about changing what is plotted and how it is plotted.  
3.  
4.  
You can display graphs in the following ways:  
Click on a switch entry handle and select one or more ports.  
Right click on a switch icon in the fabric tree and select Open Graph  
for All Ports on Switch or Open Graph for All Logged-In Ports on  
Switch from the pull-down menu.  
You can move graphs around individually by clicking and dragging, or you  
can arrange them as a group. Refer to “Arranging Graphs in the Display” on  
page 5-24 for more information.  
To remove a graph, click the graph Remove button. To remove all graphs, open  
the Window menu and select Close All.  
To remove a fabric and its graphs, select the fabric in the fabric tree, then select  
Remove Fabric from the Fabric menu. You can also right click on a fabric and  
select Remove Fabric for the popup menu.  
Right clicking on a graph opens a popup menu from which you can change graph  
options, print a graph, or save the graph statistics to a file.  
59226-00 B  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
5.6.7.1  
Arranging Graphs in the Display  
To arrange and size graphs in the display, open the Window menu and select  
Cascade, Tile, or Close All.  
Cascade overlaps the graphs so that all graphs are at least partially visible.  
Tile arranges the graphs in non-overlapping rows and columns.  
Close All closes all graphs.  
You can also click a graph on the Window menu to bring that graph to the front.  
5.6.7.2  
Customizing Graphs  
You can customize the graph polling frequency, what is plotted in the graphs, and  
the graph color scheme. To set the polling frequency for all graphs, open the  
Graph menu and select Set Polling Frequency.... Enter an interval in seconds  
(0–60) in the dialog box and click the OK button.  
To choose what is to be plotted, open the Graph menu and select Modify Graph  
Options.... You can also right click on a graph and select Change Graph  
Options. This opens the Default Graph Options dialog shown in Figure 5-9.  
5-24  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
A
Figure 5-9. Default Graph Options Dialog  
To modify the graph options, do the following:  
1.  
Choose the units for the graph:  
Select the Show Bytes Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
KBytes/second  
Select the Show Frames Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
frames/second.  
2.  
Choose what data type to plot. For example, if you selected Show Frames  
Data on Graph in step 1., you can plot one or all of the following:  
Total frames transmitted and received (Total Frames)  
Total frames transmitted (Total Tx Frames)  
Total frames received (Total Rx Frames)  
In addition to these, you can also plot total errors by selecting the Total  
Errors check box.  
3.  
Display or hide the unit grid. Select the Display Grid on Graph check box to  
display the unit grid.  
59226-00 B  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
4.  
Choose the color scheme for the graph. Click a Select Color button to open  
its corresponding Select Color dialog, which allows you to select a new color  
scheme. You can select the color for each data type, the unit grid, and the  
background by clicking the corresponding color field or button. In each case,  
you can choose a color using the Swatches, Red-Green-Blue (RGB), or  
Hue-Saturation-Brightness (HSB) method.  
NOTE:  
Clicking the Reset button in the Swatches, HSB, and RGB tab  
pages of the Select Color dialogs will reset the colors in the  
Preview area to the last saved color scheme. At this point you  
are only selecting a new color scheme to be saved.  
Swatches – Click the Swatches tab. Select a swatch from the palette.  
HSB – Click the HSB tab. Select a color using any of the following:  
Click in the color palette.  
Select the H, S, or B button and use the slide to vary the value.  
Enter values in the H, S, or B input fields.  
RGB – Click the RGB tab. Select a color by moving the slides to adjust  
the values for red, blue, and green; or enter values in the input fields.  
5.  
6.  
In the Default Graph Options dialog, click the corresponding radio button to  
apply changes to all graphs, the currently selected graph, or all new graphs.  
In the Default Graph Options dialog, click the OK button to save the color  
scheme changes and close the dialog.  
5.6.7.3  
Setting Global Graph Type  
The Set Global Graph Type option enables you to view port activity using two  
types of graphs:  
Line Graph - plots continuous port activity in horizontal line format.  
Bar Graph - the last polling value received by the application in bar graph  
format.  
To set the global graph type, open the Graph menu and select Line Bar or  
Bar Graph.  
5.6.7.4  
Rescaling a Selected Graph  
The Rescale Selected Graph option auto-scales downward and re-positions the  
data within a graphic window to display all new data captured by the graph. To  
rescale a selected graph, do the following:  
1.  
Select a displayed graph.  
5-26  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
A
2.  
3.  
Open the Graph menu and select Rescale Selected Graph, or right-click  
on the graph and select Rescale from the popup menu.  
View the data in the graph window.  
5.6.8  
Printing Graphs  
To print a graph, select a graph, then open the File menu and select Print Graph  
Window. You can also right click on a graph and select Print Graph Window  
from the popup menu.  
5.6.9  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File  
Statistics for one or all graphs can be saved to a file that can be opened with a  
spreadsheet application. To save a graph statistics file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a graph.  
Open the File menu, and select Save Current Graph Statistics to a File to  
save the selected graph or select Save All Graph Statistics to a File. You  
can also right click on a graph and select Save Statistics to File.  
3.  
4.  
In the Save dialog, enter a path name for the file. By default, the file is saved  
in the working directory.  
Click the Save button.  
59226-00 B  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 – Managing Ports  
Graphing Port Performance  
S
5-28  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Command Line Interface  
The command line interface (CLI) enables you to perform a variety of fabric and  
switch management tasks through an Ethernet connection. This section describes  
the following:  
A.1  
Logging On to a Switch  
To log on to a switch using Telnet, open a command line window on the  
workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address:  
# telnet ip_address  
A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name and  
password.  
59226-00 B  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
User Accounts  
S
A.2  
User Accounts  
Switches come from the factory with the following user account already defined:  
Account name: admin  
Password: password  
Authority: Admin  
This user account provides full access to the switch and its configuration. After  
planning your fabric management needs and creating your own user accounts,  
consider changing the password for this account.  
Refer to “Commands” on page A-6 for information about authority levels.  
Refer to the “User Command” on page A-95 for information about creating  
user accounts.  
Refer to “Passwd Command” on page A-27 for information about changing  
passwords.  
NOTE:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions  
reserved as follows:  
4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as management  
server and SNMP  
9 high priority Telnet sessions  
6 logins or sessions for SANsurfer Switch Manager inband and  
out-of-band logins, Application Programming Interface (API)  
inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins. Additional logins  
will be refused.  
A.3  
Working with Switch Configurations  
Successful management of switches and fabrics with the command line interface  
depends on the effective use of switch configurations. Modifying configurations,  
backing up configurations, and restoring configurations are key switch  
management tasks.  
A-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
A
A.3.1  
Modifying a Configuration  
A switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.  
Each switch configuration contains switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning  
configuration components.  
The Show Switch command displays the name of the active configuration. A  
configuration name can have up to 31 characters excluding the pound symbol (#),  
semicolon (;), and comma (,). By editing the latest configuration and saving the  
results under a new name, you can create a history of configuration changes. Use  
the Config List command to display the names of the configurations stored on the  
switch  
SANbox #> config list  
Current list of configurations  
------------------------------  
default  
config_10132003  
To modify a switch configuration you must open an Admin session with the Admin  
Start command. An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes  
at the same time either through Telnet or SANsurfer Switch Manager. You must  
also open a Config Edit session with the Config Edit command and indicate which  
configuration you want to modify. If you do not specify a configuration name the  
active configuration is assumed. The Config Edit session provides access to the  
Set Config commands with which you make modifications to the port, switch, port  
threshold alarm, or zoning configuration components as shown:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit default  
The config named default is being edited.  
SANbox (admin-config)#> set config port . . .  
SANbox (admin-config)#> set config switch . . .  
SANbox (admin-config)#> set config threshold . . .  
SANbox (admin-config)#> set config zoning . . .  
59226-00 B  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
S
The Config Save command saves the changes you made during the Config Edit  
session. In this case, changes to the configuration named Default are being saved  
to a new configuration named config_10132003. However, the new configuration  
does not take effect until you activate it with the Config Activate command as  
shown:  
SANbox (admin-config)#> config save config_10132003  
SANbox (admin)#> config activate config_10132003  
SANbox (admin)#> admin end  
SANbox #>  
The Admin End command releases the Admin session for other administrators  
when you are done making changes to the switch.  
A.3.2  
Backing up and Restoring Switch Configurations  
Backing up and restoring a configuration is useful to protect your work or for use  
as a template in configuring other switches. The Config Backup command creates  
a file on the switch, named configdata. This file can be used to restore a switch  
configuration only from the command line interface; it cannot be used to restore a  
switch using SANsurfer Switch Manager.  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config backup  
The configdata file contains all of the switch configuration information including  
the following:  
All named switch configurations including the default configuration. This  
includes port, switch, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration  
components.  
All SNMP and network information defined with the Set Setup command.  
The zoning database included all zone sets, zones, and aliases  
A-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Working with Switch Configurations  
A
You use FTP to download the configdata file to your workstation for safe keeping  
and to upload the file back to the switch for the restore function. To download the  
configdata file, open an FTP session on the switch and login with the account  
name images and password images. Transfer the file in binary mode with the Get  
command as shown:  
>ftp ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp>bin  
ftp>get configdata  
xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.  
ftp>quit  
You should rename the configdata file on your workstation with the switch name  
and date, config_switch_169_10112003, for example.  
The restore operation begins with FTP to upload the configuration file from the  
workstation to the switch, then finishes with a Telnet session and the Config  
Restore command. To upload the configuration file, config_switch_169_10112003  
in this case, open and FTP session with account name images and password  
images. Transfer the file in binary mode with the Put command as shown:  
ftp ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> put config_switch_169_10112003 configdata  
Local file config_switch_169_10112003  
Remote file configdata  
ftp>quit  
The restore process replaces all configuration information on  
the switch and afterwards the switch is automatically reset.  
If the restore process changes the IP address, all management  
sessions are terminated. Use the Set Setup System command to  
return the IP configuration to the values you want. Refer to  
the “Set Setup Command” on page A-57. To restore the switch,  
open a Telnet session, then enter the Config Restore command  
from within an Admin session as shown:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config restore  
The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
59226-00 B  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Commands  
S
A.4  
Commands  
The command syntax is as follows:  
command  
keyword  
keyword [value]  
keyword [value1] [value2]  
The Command is followed by one or more keywords. Consider the following rules  
and conventions:  
Commands and keywords are case insensitive.  
Required keyword values appear in standard font: [value]. Optional values  
are shown in italics: [value].  
Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the  
abbreviated form that can be used. For example the Delete keyword can be  
abbreviated Del.  
The command-line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands  
easier. Table A-1 describes the command-line completion keystrokes.  
Table A-1. Command-Line Completion  
Keystroke  
Tab  
Effect  
Completes the command line. Enter at least one character and press  
the tab key to complete the command line. If more than one possibility  
exists, press the Tab key again to display all possibilities.  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Control-A  
Control-E  
Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Scrolls forward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line  
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.  
A-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Commands  
A
The command set performs monitoring and configuration tasks. Commands  
related to monitoring tasks are available to all account names. Commands related  
to configuration tasks are available only within an admin session. An account  
must have Admin authority to enter the Admin Start command, which opens an  
admin session. Refer to the “Admin Command” on page A-8.  
The commands and their page numbers are listed in Table A-2.  
Table A-2. Commands Listed by Authority Level  
Monitoring Commands  
Configuration Command  
(A-8)  
Help  
History  
Ping  
Ps  
(A-20)  
(A-21)  
(A-28)  
(A-29)  
(A-30)  
(A-62)  
Admin  
Alias1  
Admin Session Commands  
(A-9)  
Config1  
(A-11)  
(A-14)  
(A-16)  
(A-17)  
(A-18)  
(A-19)  
(A-22)  
(A-23)  
(A-26)  
(A-27)  
(A-31)  
(A-37)  
(A-40)  
(A-51)  
(A-55)  
(A-57)  
(A-90)  
(A-91)  
(A-95)  
(A-99)  
(A-103)  
(A-106)  
Quit  
Create Support  
Date1  
Show  
Show Config  
Show Log  
Show Perf  
Show Setup  
Uptime  
(A-77)  
(A-81)  
(A-85)  
(A-87)  
(A-94)  
(A-98)  
Feature1  
Firmware Install  
Hardreset  
Hotreset  
Image  
Whoami  
Lip  
Passwd  
Reset  
Set1  
Set Config  
Set Log  
Set Port1  
Set Setup  
Shutdown  
Test  
2
User1  
Zone1  
Zoneset1  
Zoning1  
1Some keywords do not require an Admin session.  
2 Some keywords can be executed only by the Admin account name.  
59226-00 B  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Admin Command  
S
Admin Command  
Opens and closes an Admin session. The Admin session provides commands  
that change the fabric and switch configurations. Only one Admin session can be  
open on the switch at any time. An inactive Admin session will time out after a  
period of time which can be changed using the Set Setup System command.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
admin  
start (or begin)  
end (or stop)  
cancel  
Keywords start (or begin)  
Opens the admin session.  
end (or stop)  
Closes the admin session. The Hardreset, Hotreset, Logout, Shutdown, and  
Reset Switch commands will also end an admin session.  
cancel  
Terminates an Admin session opened by another user. Use this keyword with care  
because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and  
without saving pending changes.  
Notes  
Closing a Telnet window during an admin session does not release the session. In  
this case, you must either wait for the admin session to time out, or use the Admin  
Cancel command.  
Examples The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #>  
.
.
.
SANbox (admin) #> admin end  
SANbox #>  
A-8  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
A
Alias Command  
Creates a named set of ports/devices. Aliases make it easier to assign a set of  
ports/devices to many zones. An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a  
member.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except List and Members  
alias  
add [alias] [member_list]  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
create [alias]  
delete [alias]  
list  
members [alias]  
remove [alias] [member_list]  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Keywords add [alias] [member_list]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [member_list] to add to the alias  
named [alias]. Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. An alias  
can have a maximum of 2000 members. A port/device in [member_list] can have  
any of the following formats:  
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–239; port numbers can be 0–255.  
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
The application verifies that the [alias] format is correct, but does not validate that  
such a port/device exists.  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
Creates a new alias named [alias_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the alias given by [alias_source].  
create [alias]  
Creates an alias with the name given by [alias]. An alias name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases.  
59226-00 B  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
S
delete [alias]  
Deletes the specified alias given by [alias] from the zoning database. If the alias is  
a member of the active zone set, the alias will not be removed from the active  
zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
list  
Displays a list of all aliases. This keyword does not require an admin session.  
members [alias]  
Displays all members of the alias given by [alias]. This keyword does not require  
an admin session.  
remove [alias] [member_list]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the alias given by [alias].  
Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. A port/device in  
[member_list] can have any of the following formats:  
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–239; port numbers can be 0–255.  
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) for the device with  
the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Renames the alias given by [alias_old] to the alias given by [alias_new].  
A-10  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
A
Config Command  
Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch. For information about  
setting the port and switch configurations, refer to the “Set Config Command” on  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except List  
config  
activate [config_name]  
backup  
cancel  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
delete [config_name]  
edit [config_name]  
list  
restore  
save [config_name]  
Keywords activate [config_name]  
Activates the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the  
currently active configuration is used. Only one configuration can be active at a  
time.  
backup  
Creates a file named configdata, which contains the system configuration  
information. To download this file, open an FTP session, log in with account  
name/password of “images” for both, and type “get configdata”. Refer to “Backing  
cancel  
Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that  
were made.  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
Copies the configuration given by [config_source] to the configuration given by  
[config_destination]. The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the  
default configuration.  
delete [config_name]  
Deletes the configuration given by [config_name] from the switch. You cannot  
delete the default configuration (Default Config) nor the active configuration.  
59226-00 B  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
S
edit [config_name]  
Opens an edit session for the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit  
[config_name], the currently active configuration is used.  
list  
Displays a list of all available configurations on the switch. This keyword does not  
require an admin session.  
restore  
Restores configuration settings to an out-of-band switch from a backup file named  
configdata, which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP. You create the  
backup file using the Config Backup command. Use FTP to load the backup file  
on a switch, then enter the Config Restore command. After the restore is  
complete, the switch automatically resets. Refer to “Backing up and Restoring  
NOTE:  
If the restore process changes the IP address, all management  
sessions are terminated. Use the Set Setup System command to  
return the IP configuration to the values you want. Refer to the “Set  
Configuration archive files created with the SANsurfer Switch  
Manager Archive function are not compatible with the Config  
Restore command.  
save [config_name]  
Saves changes made during a configuration edit session in the configuration  
given by [config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the value for [config_name]  
you chose for the most recent Config Edit command is used. [config_name] can  
be up to 31 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The switch  
supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.  
Notes  
If you edit the active configuration, changes will be held in suspense until you  
reactivate the configuration or activate another configuration.  
Examples The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit  
The config named default is being edited.  
.
.
SANbox (admin-config) #> config cancel  
Configuration mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
SANbox (admin) #> admin end  
A-12  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
A
The following is an example of how to create a backup file (configdata) and  
download the file to the workstation.  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config backup  
SANbox (admin) #> admin end  
SANbox #> exit  
#>ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> get configdata  
ftp> quit  
The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file  
(configdata) from the workstation to the switch, and then restore the configuration.  
#> ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> put configdata  
ftp> quit  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config restore  
The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1005.0021][SM][Configuration is being  
restored - this could take several minutes !]  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1000.000A][SM][The switch will be reset in  
3 seconds due to a config restore]  
SANbox (admin) #>  
Alarm Msg: [day month date time year][A1000.0005][SM][The switch is being reset]  
Good bye.  
59226-00 B  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Create Support Command  
S
Create Support Command  
Assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file  
(dump_support.tgz zip) and prompts you to send it to a remote host. This file is  
useful to technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems. Use  
this command when directed by your authorized maintenance provider. The  
command prompts you for the following:  
IP address of the remote host  
An account name and password on the remote host  
Pathname for an existing folder on the remote host  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
create support  
A-14  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Create Support Command  
A
Examples The following is an example of the Create Support command:  
SANbox (admin) #> create support  
Log Msg: [day month date time UTC 2004][C][8400.003B][Switch][Creating the support  
file - this will take several seconds]  
FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): y  
Enter IP Address of remote computer: 10.20.33.130  
Login name: johndoe  
Enter remote directory name: bin/support  
Would you like to continue downloading support file? (y/n) [n]: y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
cd bin/support  
250 CWD command successful.  
lcd /itasca/conf/images  
Local directory now /itasca/conf/images  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
put dump_support.tgz  
local: dump_support.tgz remote: dump_support.tgz  
227 Entering Passive Mode (10,20,33,130,232,133)  
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump_support.tgz.  
226 Transfer complete.  
43430 bytes sent in 0.292 secs (1.5e+02 Kbytes/sec)  
Remote system type is UNIX.  
Using binary mode to transfer files.  
221-You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files.  
221-Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers.  
221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost.localdomain.  
FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): n  
59226-00 B  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Date Command  
S
Date Command  
This command displays or sets the system date and time. To set the date and time  
the information string must be provided in this format: MMDDhhmmCCYY. The  
new date and time takes effect immediately. Network Time Protocol (NTP) must  
be disabled to set the time with the Date command. Refer to the “Set Setup  
Command” on page A-57, System keyword, for information about NTP.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except to display the date.  
date  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Keywords [MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Specifies the date – this requires an admin session. If you omit  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY], the current date is displayed which does not require an  
admin session.  
Examples The following is an example of the Date command:  
SANbox #> date  
Mon Apr 07 07:51:24 2003  
A-16  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Feature Command  
A
Feature Command  
Displays the license key feature log.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
feature  
add [license_key]  
log  
Keywords add [license_key]  
This keyword does not apply to this switch because there are no licensable  
features.  
log  
Displays a list of installed license key features.  
59226-00 B  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Firmware Install Command  
S
Firmware Install Command  
Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, installs the firmware, then  
resets the switch to activate the firmware. This is disruptive to I/O traffic. To  
perform a non-disruptive firmware installation, refer to the “Image Command” on  
The command prompts you for the following:  
IP address of the remote host  
An account name and password on the remote host  
Pathname for the firmware image file  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
firmware install  
Examples The following is an example of the Firmware Install command:  
SANbox (admin) #> firmware install  
Warning: Installing new firmware requires a switch reset.  
Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions,  
including any Telnet sessions. When the firmware activation is complete,  
you may log in to the switch again.  
Do you want to continue? [y/n]: y  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
User Account  
IP Address  
: johndoe  
: 10.20.33.130  
Source Filename : 5.0.00.11_mpc  
About to install image. Do you want to continue? [y/n] y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
verbose  
Verbose mode off.  
This may take several seconds...  
The switch will now reset.  
Connection closed by foreign host.  
A-18  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hardreset Command  
A
Hardreset Command  
Resets the switch and performs a power-on self test. This reset disrupts traffic,  
activates the pending firmware, and clears the alarm log. To save the alarm log  
before resetting, refer to the “Set Log Command” on page A-51.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
Admin session  
hardreset  
To reset the switch without a power-on self test, refer to the “Reset Command” on  
To reset the switch without disrupting traffic, refer to the “Hotreset Command” on  
59226-00 B  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Help Command  
S
Help Command  
Displays a brief description of the specified command, its keywords, and usage.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
help [command] [keyword]  
Keywords [command]  
Displays a summary of the command given by [command] and its keywords. If you  
omit [command], the system displays all available commands.  
[keyword]  
Displays a summary of the keyword given by [keyword] belonging to the  
command given by [command]. If you omit [keyword], the system displays the  
available keywords for the specified command.  
all  
Displays a list of all available commands (including command variations).  
Examples The following is an example of the Help Config command:  
SANbox #> help config  
config CONFIG_OPTIONS  
The config command operates on configurations.  
Usage: config  
{ activate | backup  
edit | list  
| cancel  
| copy  
| delete  
|
| restore | save }  
The following is an example of the Help Config Edit command:  
SANbox #> help config edit  
config edit [CONFIG_NAME]  
This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session  
into config edit mode.  
If CONFIG_NAME is given and it exists, it gets edited; otherwise, it gets  
created. If it is not given, the currently active configuration is edited.  
Admin mode is required for this command.  
Usage: config edit [CONFIG_NAME]  
A-20  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
History Command  
A
History Command  
Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can  
re-execute selected commands.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
None  
history  
Use the History command to provide context for the ! command:  
Enter ![command_string] to re-execute the most recent command that  
matches [command_string].  
Enter ![line number] to re-execute the corresponding command from the  
History display  
Enter ![partial command string] to re-execute a command that matches the  
command string.  
Enter !! to re-execute the most recent command.  
Examples The following is an example of the History command:  
SANbox #> history  
1 show switch  
2 date  
3 help set  
4 history  
SANbox #> !3  
help set  
set SET_OPTIONS  
There are many attributes that can be set.  
Type help with one of the following to get more information:  
Usage: set  
{ alarm  
port  
| beacon  
| setup  
| config  
| log  
| pagebreak |  
| switch }  
59226-00 B  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hotreset Command  
S
Hotreset Command  
Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without  
disrupting traffic. This command terminates all management sessions, saves all  
configuration information, and clears the event log. After the pending firmware is  
activated, the configuration is recovered. This process takes less than 80  
seconds. To save the event log to a file before resetting, refer to the “Set Log  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
Admin session  
hotreset  
You can load and activate version 5.0.x firmware on an operating switch  
without disrupting data traffic or having to re-initialize attached devices under  
the following conditions:  
The current firmware version is a 5.0.x version that precedes the  
upgrade version.  
No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including  
powering up, powering down, disconnecting or connecting ISLs, and  
switch configuration changes.  
No port in the fabric is in the diagnostic state.  
No zoning changes are being made in the fabric.  
No changes are being made to attached devices including powering  
up, powering down, disconnecting, connecting, and HBA configuration  
changes.  
Ports that are stable when the non-disruptive activation begins, then change  
states, will be reset. When the non-disruptive activation is complete,  
SANsurfer Switch Manager sessions reconnect automatically. However,  
Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.  
This command clears the event log and all counters.  
A-22  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
A
Image Command  
Manages and installs switch firmware.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
image  
cleanup  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
install  
list  
unpack [file]  
Keywords cleanup  
Removes all firmware image files from the switch. All firmware image files are  
removed automatically each time the switch is reset.  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
Retrieves image file given by [file_source] and stores it on the switch with the file  
name given by [file_destination]. The image file is retrieved from the FTP server  
with the IP address given by [ip_address] and an account name given by  
[account_name]. If an account name needs a password to access the FTP server,  
the system will prompt you for it.  
install  
Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, installs the firmware, then  
resets the switch to activate the firmware. This is disruptive to I/O traffic. The  
command prompts you for the following:  
IP address of the remote host  
An account name and password on the remote host  
Pathname for the firmware image file  
list  
Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch.  
unpack [file]  
Installs the firmware file given by [file]. After unpacking the file, a message  
appears confirming successful unpacking. The switch must be reset for the new  
firmware to take effect.  
Notes  
To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches  
are running the same version of firmware.  
To install firmware when the management workstation has an FTP server, use the  
Image Install command or the “Firmware Install Command” on page A-18.  
59226-00 B  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
S
To install firmware when the management workstation does not have an FTP  
server, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Connect to the switch through the Ethernet port.  
Move to the folder or directory on the workstation that contains the new  
firmware image file.  
3.  
Establish communications with the switch using the File Transfer Protocol  
(FTP). Enter one of the following on the command line:  
>ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
or  
>ftp switchname  
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the switch IP address, and switchname is the  
switch name associated with the IP address.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Enter the following account name and password:  
user:images  
password: images  
Activate binary mode and copy the firmware image file on the switch:  
ftp>bin  
ftp>put filename  
Wait for the transfer to complete, then close the FTP session.  
xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.  
ftp>quit  
Establish communications with the switch using the CLI. Enter one of the  
following on the command line:  
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
or  
telnet switchname  
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the switch IP address, and switchname is the  
switch name associated with the IP address.  
8.  
9.  
A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name  
and password. The default account name and password are (admin,  
password).  
Open an Admin session to acquire the necessary authority.  
SANbox $>admin start  
10. Display the list of firmware image files on the switch to confirm that the file  
was loaded.  
SANbox (admin) $>image list  
11. Unpack the firmware image file to install the new firmware in flash memory.  
SANbox (admin) $>image unpack filename  
A-24  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
A
12. Wait for the unpack to complete.  
image unpack command result: Passed  
13. A message will prompt you to reset the switch to activate the firmware.  
Resetting the switch is disruptive. Use the Hotreset command to attempt a  
non-disruptive activation.  
SANbox (admin) $>hotreset  
Examples The following is an example of the Image Install command:  
SANbox (admin) #> image install  
Warning: Installing new firmware requires a switch reset.  
Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions,  
including any Telnet sessions. When the firmware activation is complete,  
you may log in to the switch again.  
Do you want to continue? [y/n]: y  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
User Account  
IP Address  
: johndoe  
: 10.20.33.130  
Source Filename : 5.0.00.11_mpc  
About to install image. Do you want to continue? [y/n] y  
Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).  
220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.  
331 Password required for johndoe.  
Password: xxxxxxxxx  
230 User johndoe logged in.  
bin  
200 Type set to I.  
verbose  
Verbose mode off.  
This may take several seconds...  
The switch will now reset.  
Connection closed by foreign host.  
59226-00 B  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Lip Command  
S
Lip Command  
Reinitializes the specified loop port.  
Admin session  
lip [port_number]  
Authority  
Syntax  
Keywords [port_number]  
The number of the port to be reinitialized. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
Examples The following is an example of the Lip command:  
SANbox (admin) #> lip 2  
A-26  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Passwd Command  
A
Passwd Command  
Changes a user account’s password.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin account name and an admin session to change another account’s  
password; You can change you own password without an Admin session.  
passwd [account_name]  
Keywords [account_name]  
The user account name. To change the password for an account name other than  
your own, you must open an admin session with the account name Admin. If you  
omit [account_name], you will be prompted to change the password for the  
current account name.  
Examples The following is an example of the Passwd command:  
SANbox (admin) #> passwd user2  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account OLD password  
: ********  
account NEW password (4-20 chars) : ********  
please confirm account NEW password: ********  
password has been changed.  
59226-00 B  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ping Command  
S
Ping Command  
Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch over an Ethernet network  
and reports the result.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
ping  
ip_address  
Keywords ip_address  
The IP address of the switch to query.  
Examples The following is an example of a successful Ping command:  
SANbox #> ping 10.20.11.57  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
SANbox #>  
Response successfully received from 10.20.11.57.  
This following is an example of an unsuccessful Ping command:  
SANbox #> ping 10.20.10.100  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
No response from 10.20.10.100. Unreachable.  
A-28  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ps Command  
A
Ps Command  
Displays current system process information.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
ps  
Examples The following is an example of the Ps command:  
SANbox #> ps  
PID PPID %CPU  
TIME  
ELAPSED COMMAND  
338  
339  
340  
341  
342  
343  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
349  
350  
351  
352  
404  
405  
406  
327 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:35 cns  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:35 ens  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:35 dlog  
327 0.1 00:05:35 3-01:18:35 ds  
327 0.2 00:11:29 3-01:18:35 mgmtApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:35 fc2  
327 0.0 00:02:16 3-01:18:35 nserver  
327 0.0 00:02:44 3-01:18:35 mserver  
327 0.8 00:35:12 3-01:18:35 util  
327 0.0 00:00:29 3-01:18:35 snmpservicepath  
327 0.0 00:02:46 3-01:18:34 eport  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:34 PortApp  
327 5.6 04:08:24 3-01:18:34 port_mon  
327 0.0 00:01:38 3-01:18:34 zoning  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:34 diagApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:27 snmpd  
327 0.0 00:00:02 3-01:18:27 snmpmain  
405 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:26 snmpmain  
59226-00 B  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Quit Command  
S
Quit Command  
Closes the Telnet session.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
None  
quit, exit, or logout  
You can also enter Control-D to close the Telnet session.  
A-30  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
A
Reset Command  
Resets the switch configuration parameters. If you omit the keyword, the default is  
Reset Switch.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
reset  
config [config_name]  
factory  
port [port_number]  
snmp  
switch (default)  
system  
zoning  
Keywords config [config_name]  
Resets the configuration given by [config_name] to the factory default values for  
switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration. If [config_name] does  
not exist on the switch, a configuration with that name will be created. If you omit  
[config_name], the active configuration is reset. You must activate the  
configuration for the changes to take effect. Refer to Table A-3 through Table A-6  
for switch, port, and port threshold alarm configuration default values.  
factory  
Resets switch configuration, port configuration, port threshold alarm configuration,  
zoning configuration, SNMP configuration, system configuration, and zoning to  
the factory default values. The switch configuration is activated automatically.  
Refer to Table A-3 through Table A-8.  
NOTE:  
Because this keyword changes network parameters, the  
workstation could lose communication with the switch and  
release the Admin session.  
port [port_number]  
Reinitializes the port given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning  
with 0.  
snmp  
Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values. Refer to  
Table A-7 for SNMP configuration default values.  
59226-00 B  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
S
switch  
Resets the switch without a power-on self test. This is the default. This reset  
disrupts traffic and does the following:  
Activates the pending firmware.  
Closes all management sessions.  
Clears the event log. To save the event log before resetting, refer to the “Set  
To reset the switch with a power-on self test, refer to the “Hardreset Command” on  
page A-19. To reset the switch without disrupting traffic, refer to the “Hotreset  
system  
Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values. Refer to  
Table A-8 for system configuration default values.  
NOTE:  
Because this keyword changes network parameters, the  
workstation could lose communication with the switch.  
zoning  
Clears the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set. The zoning  
configuration values (autosave, default visibility) remain unchanged.  
Notes  
The following tables specify the various factory default settings:  
Table A-3. Switch Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Online  
True  
Broadcast Enabled  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
FDMIEntries  
Domain ID  
True  
True  
1000  
1 (0x Hex)  
False  
Domain ID Lock  
Symbolic Name  
R_A_TOV  
SANbox  
10000  
2000  
E_D_TOV  
A-32  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
A
Table A-3. Switch Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Principal Priority  
Default  
254  
Configuration Description  
InteropMode  
Default Config  
Standard  
False  
LegacyAddressFormat  
Table A-4. Port Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Link Speed  
Online  
Auto  
Port Type  
GL  
Symbolic Name  
ALFairness  
Port n, where n is the port number  
False  
True  
False  
False  
0
DeviceScanEnabled  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
ARB_FF  
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnable  
True  
True  
False  
False  
False  
True  
False  
Auto  
True  
AutoPerfTuning  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
IOStreamGuard  
PDISCPingEnable  
59226-00 B  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
S
Table A-5. Port Threshold Alarm Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
False  
True  
25  
1
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
True  
25  
0
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
True  
2
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
0
10  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
True  
5
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
True  
5
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
True  
100  
5
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
A-34  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
A
Table A-6. Zoning Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
InteropAutoSave  
Default  
True  
All  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
False  
Table A-7. SNMP Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
SNMPEnabled  
Contact  
True  
<syscontact undefined>  
Location  
<sysLocation undefined>  
Description  
SANbox 1400 FC Switch  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
ObjectID  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2–5: 0.0.0.0  
162  
Warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.27  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
False  
True  
59226-00 B  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
S
Table A-8. System Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Ethernet Network Discovery  
Default  
Static  
Ethernet Network IP Address  
Ethernet Network IP Mask  
Ethernet Gateway Address  
Admin Timeout  
10.0.0.1  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
30 minutes  
0
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
True  
RemotelogEnabled  
False  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
10.0.0.254  
False  
NTPServerAddress  
10.0.0.254  
True  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
A-36  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
A
Set Command  
Sets a variety of switch parameters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session for all keywords except Alarm, Beacon, and Pagebreak which are  
available without an Admin session.  
set  
alarm [option]  
beacon [state]  
config [option]  
log [option]  
pagebreak [state]  
port [option]  
setup [option]  
switch [state]  
timezone  
Keywords alarm [option]  
Controls the display of alarms in the session output stream or clears the alarm log.  
[option] can be one of the following:  
clear  
Clears the alarm log history. This value requires an Admin session.  
on  
Enables the display of alarms in the session output stream.  
off  
Disables the display of alarms in the session output stream.  
beacon [state]  
Enables or disables the flashing of the Logged-In LEDs according to [state]. This  
keyword does not require an admin session. [state] can be one of the following:  
on  
Enables the flashing beacon.  
off  
Disables the flashing beacon.  
config [option]  
Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration parameters.  
59226-00 B  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
S
log [option]  
Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log. Refer to the “Set Log  
pagebreak [state]  
Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time according to  
the value given by [state]. This keyword does not require an admin session. [state]  
can be one of the following:  
on  
Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time. The page break  
functions affects the following commands: Alias (List, Members), Show  
(Alarm, Log), Zone (List, Members), Zoneset (List, Zones), Zoning (Active,  
List).  
off  
Allows continuous display of information without a break.  
port [option]  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port. The previous Set Config Port  
settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch  
configuration. Refer to the “Set Port Command” on page A-55.  
setup [option]  
Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. Refer to the “Set Setup  
switch [state]  
Changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch to the state given by  
[state]. The previous Set Config Switch settings are restored after a switch reset  
or a reactivation of a switch configuration. [state] can be one of the following:  
online  
Places all ports online  
offline  
Places all ports offline.  
diagnostics  
Prepares all ports for testing.  
A-38  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
A
timezone  
Specifies the time zone for the switch and the workstation. The default is Universal  
Time (UTC) also known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This keyword prompts  
you to choose a region, then a subregion to specify the time zone.  
Examples The following examples enables and disables the beacon:  
SANbox #> set beacon on  
Command succeeded.  
SANbox $> set beacon off  
Command succeeded.  
59226-00 B  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
Set Config Command  
Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration parameters. The  
changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power  
cycle the switch unless you save them using the Config Save command. Refer to  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a Config Edit session  
set config  
port [port_number]  
ports [port_number]  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords port [port_number]  
Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port  
number given by [port_number]. If you omit [port_number], the system begins with  
port 0 and proceeds in order through the last port. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Enter “q” to end the configuration for one port, or “qq” to end the configuration for  
all ports. Table A-9 describes the port parameters.  
ports [port_number]  
Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all  
ports based on the configuration for the port given by [port_number]. If you omit  
[port_number], port 0 is used. For each parameter, enter a new value or press the  
Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. Enter “q” to end the  
configuration. Table A-9 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters  
Parameter  
AdminState  
Description  
Port administrative state:  
Online – Activates and prepares the port to send  
data. This is the default.  
Offline – Prevents the port from receiving signal and  
accepting a device login.  
Diagnostics – Prepares the port for testing and pre-  
vents the port from accepting a device login.  
Down – Disables the port by removing power from  
the port lasers.  
A-40  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
A
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
LinkSpeed  
Description  
Transmission speed: 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, 4-Gbps, or Auto.  
The default is Auto.  
PortType  
Port type: GL, G, F, FL, Donor. The default is GL.  
SymbolicPortName  
Descriptive name for the port. The name can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,).  
The default is Port n where n is the port number.  
ALFairness  
Arbitration loop fairness. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the switch’s priority to arbitrate on the loop. The  
default is False.  
DeviceScanEnabled  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the scanning of the  
connected device for FC-4 descriptor information during  
login. The default is True.  
Enables (False) or disables (True) the immediate trans-  
mission of RSCN messages when communication  
between a port and a device is interrupted. If enabled,  
the RSCN message is delayed for 200 ms for locally  
attached devices and 400 ms for devices connected  
through other switches. The default is False. This param-  
eter is ignored if IOStreamGuard is enabled.  
ARB_FF  
Send ARB_FF (True) instead of IDLEs (False) on the  
loop. The default is False.  
InteropCredit  
Interoperability credit. The number of buffer-to-buffer  
credits per port. 0 means the default (8) is unchanged.  
Changing interoperability credits is necessary only for  
E_Ports that are connected to non-FC-SW-2-compliant  
switches. Contact your authorized maintenance provider  
for assistance in using this feature.  
ExtCredit  
Extended credits. The number of port buffer credits that  
this port can acquire from donor ports. The default is 0.  
FANEnable  
Fabric address notification. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the communication of the FL_Port address, port  
name, and node name to the logged-in NL_Port. The  
default is True.  
59226-00 B  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
AutoPerfTuning  
Description  
Automatic performance tuning for FL_Ports only. The  
default is True.  
If AutoPerfTuning is enabled (True) and the port is  
an FL_Port, MFSEnable is automatically enabled.  
LCFEnable and VIEnable are overridden to False.  
If AutoPerfTuning is disabled (False), MFSEnable,  
LCFEnable, and VIEnable retain their original val-  
ues.  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
Link control frame preference routing. This parameter  
appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Enables (True)  
or disables (False) preferred routing of frames with  
R_CTL = 1100 (Class 2 responses). The default is False.  
Enabling LCFEnable will disable MFSEnable.  
Multi-Frame Sequence bundling. This parameter  
appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Prevents (True)  
or allows (False) the interleaving of frames in a  
sequence. The default is False. Enabling MFSEnable  
disables LCFEnable and VIEnable.  
Virtual Interface (VI) preference routing. This parameter  
appears only if AutoPerfTuning is False. Enables (True)  
or disables (False) VI preference routing. The default is  
False. Enabling VIEnable will disable MFSEnable.  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
Management server enable. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) management server on this port. The default is  
True.  
Loop circuit closure prevention. Enables (True) or dis-  
ables (False) the loop’s ability to remain in the open state  
indefinitely. True reduces the amount of arbitration on a  
loop when there is only one device on the loop. The  
default is False.  
A-42  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
A
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
IOStreamGuard  
Description  
I/O Stream Guard. Enables or disables the suppression  
of RSCN messages. IOStreamGuard can have the fol-  
lowing values:  
Enable – Suppresses the reception of RSCN mes-  
sages from other ports for which IOStreamGuard is  
enabled.  
Disable – Allows free transmission and reception of  
RSCN messages.  
Auto – Suppresses the reception of RSCN mes-  
sages under the following conditions: 1) The port is  
connected to an initiator device with a QLogic HBA,  
2) The DeviceScanEnable parameter is enabled.  
Auto is the default.  
PDISCPingEnable  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the transmission of  
ping messages from the switch to all devices on a loop  
port. The default is True.  
switch  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets. Table A-10 describes the Set Config Switch  
parameters.  
Table A-10. Set Config Switch Parameters  
Parameter  
AdminState  
Description  
Switch administrative state: online, offline, or diagnos-  
tics. The default is Online.  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
Broadcast. Enables (True) or disables (False) forward-  
ing of broadcast frames. The default is True.  
Inband management. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) the ability to manage the switch over an ISL.  
The default is True.  
FDMIEnabled  
Fabric Device Monitoring Interface. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) the monitoring of target and initiator  
device information.  
59226-00 B  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
Table A-10. Set Config Switch Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
FDMIEntries  
The number of device entries to maintain in the FDMI  
database. Enter a number from 0–1000. The default is  
1000.  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
Default domain ID. The default is 1.  
Prevents (True) or allows (False) dynamic reassign-  
ment of the domain ID. The default is False.  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
Descriptive name for the switch. The name can be up  
to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and  
comma (,). The default is SANbox.  
Resource Allocation Timeout Value. The number of  
milliseconds the switch waits to allow two ports to allo-  
cate enough resources to establish a link. The default  
is 10000.  
E_D_TOV  
Error Detect Timeout Value. The number of millisec-  
onds a port is to wait for errors to clear. The default is  
2000.  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
The priority used in the FC-SW-2 principal switch  
selection algorithm. 1 is high, 255 is low. The default is  
254.  
Switch configuration description. The configuration  
description can be up to 32 characters excluding #,  
semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is  
Config Default.  
InteropMode  
Propagates just the active zone set throughout the fab-  
ric (Standard, FC-SW-2 compliant) or the entire zoning  
database (Interop-1, non-compliant). The default is  
Standard.  
LegacyAddressFormat  
Available only when the InteropMode parameter is  
Interop-1, this parameter enables (True) or disables  
(False) the use of legacy address formatting for inter-  
operating with non-FC-SW-2 switches. The default is  
False.  
A-44  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
A
threshold  
Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected  
events. The system displays each event, its triggers, and sampling window one  
line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value  
or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. These  
parameters must be saved in a configuration and activated before they will take  
effect. Refer to the “Config Command” on page A-11 for information about saving  
and activating a configuration. Table A-11 describes the Set Config Threshold  
parameters. The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within  
three consecutive sampling windows (by default 30 seconds). Reset the port to  
bring it back online. An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects  
that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger.  
Table A-11. Set Config Threshold Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Threshold Monitoring Enabled  
Master enable/disable parameter for all events.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation  
of all enabled event alarms. The default is False.  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
The event type enable/disable parameter.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation  
of alarms for each of the following events:  
CRC errors  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
Decode errors  
ISL connection count  
Device login errors  
Device logout errors  
Loss-of-signal errors  
Rising Trigger  
Falling Trigger  
Sample Window  
The event count above which a rising trigger  
alarm is logged. The switch will not generate  
another rising trigger alarm for that event until the  
count descends below the falling trigger and again  
exceeds the rising trigger.  
The event count below which a falling trigger  
alarm is logged. The switch will not generate  
another falling trigger alarm for that event until the  
count exceeds the rising trigger and descends  
again below the falling trigger.  
The period of time in seconds in which to count  
events.  
59226-00 B  
A-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
zoning  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch zoning attributes. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-12. Set Config Zoning Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
InteropAutoSave  
Available only when the InteropMode parameter is Standard, this  
parameter enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of  
changes to active zone set in the switch’s permanent memory.  
Refer to “InteropMode” on page A-44. The default is True.  
Disabling the Autosave parameter can be useful to prevent the  
propagation of zoning information when experimenting with dif-  
ferent zoning schemes. However, leaving the Autosave parame-  
ter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch  
have to be reset. For this reason, the Autosave parameter  
should be enabled in a production environment.  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
Enables (All) or disables (None) communication among the  
switch’s ports/devices and the fabric in the absence of an active  
zone set. The default is All.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the discarding of all inactive  
zone sets from that zoning database. Inactive zone sets are all  
zone sets except the active zone set. The default is False.  
A-46  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
A
Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Port command:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox (admin-config) #> set config port 1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Configuring Port Number: 1  
------------------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics, 4=Down)  
(1=1Gb/s, 2=2Gb/s, 4=4Gb/s, A=Auto)  
(GL / G / F / FL / Donor)  
[Online]  
[Auto ]  
[GL  
]
SymPortName  
ALFairness  
(string, max=32 chars)  
[Port1 ]  
[False ]  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
(True / False)  
DeviceScanEnable (True / False)  
ForceOfflineRSCN (True / False)  
ARB_FF  
(True / False)  
InteropCredit (decimal value, 0-255)  
[0  
[0  
]
]
ExtCredit  
FANEnable  
(dec value, increments of 7, non-loop only)  
(True / False)  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[Disable]  
[True ]  
AutoPerfTuning (True / False)  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
VIEnable  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
IOStreamGuard (Enable / Disable / Auto)  
PDISCPingEnable (True / False)  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
SANbox (admin-config) #>  
59226-00 B  
A-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox (admin-config) #> set config switch  
A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
AdminState  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics) [Online  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
BroadcastEnable  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
FDMIEntries  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
(True / False)  
[False  
[False  
[True  
[1000  
[11  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
(decimal value, 1-239)  
(True / False)  
[True  
[SANbox  
[10000  
[2000  
[254  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(decimal value, 100-100000 msec)  
(decimal value, 10-20000 msec)  
E_D_TOV  
PrincipalPriority (decimal value, 1-255)  
ConfigDescription (string, max=32 chars)  
[Default Config]  
InteropMode  
(0=Standard, 1=Interop_1)  
[Standard  
]
A-48  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
A
The following is an example of the Set Config Threshold command:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox (admin-config) #> set config threshold  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
(True / False)  
[False  
]
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
[25  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
[1  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled (True / False)  
[True  
[25  
]
]
]
]
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[0  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[2  
[0  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[5  
[1  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[5  
[1  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
]
]
]
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[100  
[5  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
59226-00 B  
A-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
S
The following is an example of the Set Config Zoning command.  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox (admin-config) #> set config zoning  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q'  
or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
InteropAutoSave  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
(True / False) [True]  
(All / None) [All ]  
(True / False) [False]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
A-50  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
A
Set Log Command  
Specifies the events to record in the event log and display on the screen. You  
determine what events to record in the switch event log using the Component,  
Level, and Port keywords. You determine what events are automatically displayed  
on the screen using the Display keyword. Alarms are always displayed on the  
screen.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
set log  
archive  
clear  
component [filter_list]  
display [filter]  
level [filter]  
port [port_list]  
restore  
save  
start (default)  
stop  
Keywords archive  
Collects all log entries and stores the result in new file named logfile that is  
maintained in switch memory where it can be downloaded using FTP. To  
download logfile, open an FTP session, log in with account name/password of  
“images” for both, and type “get logfile”.  
clear  
Clears all log entries.  
component [filter_list]  
Specifies one or more components given by [filter_list] to monitor for events. A  
component is a firmware module that is responsible for a particular portion of  
switch operation. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list. [filter_list] can be one  
or more of the following:  
All  
Monitors all components. To maintain optimal switch performance, do not  
use this setting with the Level keyword set to Info.  
Chassis  
Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies.  
59226-00 B  
A-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
S
Eport  
Monitors all E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Monitors management server status.  
Nameserver  
Monitors name server status.  
None  
Monitor none of the component events.  
Other  
Monitors other miscellaneous events.  
Port  
Monitors all port events.  
SNMP  
Monitors all SNMP events.  
Switch  
Monitors switch management events.  
Zoning  
Monitors zoning conflict events.  
display [filter]  
Specifies the log events to automatically display on the screen according to the  
event severity levels given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following values:  
Critical  
Critical severity level events. The critical level describes events that are  
generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but  
require no action.  
Warn  
Warning severity level events. The warning level describes events that are  
generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but  
are more important than the informative level events.  
Info  
Informative severity level events. The informative level describes routine  
events associated with a normal fabric.  
A-52  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
A
None  
Specifies no severity levels for display on the screen.  
level [filter]  
Specifies the severity level given by [filter] to use in monitoring and logging events  
for the specified components or ports. [filter] can be one of the following values:  
Critical  
Monitors critical events. The critical level describes events that are generally  
disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but require no  
action.  
Warn  
Monitors warning and critical events. The warning level describes events  
that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the  
fabric, but are more important than the informative level events.  
Info  
Monitors informative, warning, and critical events. The informative level  
describes routine events associated with a normal fabric. This is the default  
severity level.  
None  
Monitors none of the severity levels.  
port [port_list]  
Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events. Choose one of the following  
values:  
[port_list]  
Specifies port or ports to monitor. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list.  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
All  
Specifies all ports.  
None  
Disables monitoring on all ports.  
restore  
Restores and saves the port, component, and level settings to the default values.  
59226-00 B  
A-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
S
save  
Saves the log settings for the component, severity level, port, and display level.  
These settings remain in effect after a switch reset. The log settings can be  
viewed using the Show Log Settings command. To export log entries to a file, use  
the Set Log Archive command.  
start  
Starts the logging of events based on the Port, Component, and Level keywords  
assigned to the current configuration. The logging continues until you enter the  
Set Log Stop command.  
stop  
Stops logging of events.  
Notes  
In addition to critical, warn, and informative severity levels, the highest event  
severity level is alarm. The alarm level describes events that are disruptive to the  
administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention.  
Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the screen.  
A-54  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Port Command  
A
Set Port Command  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch  
reset or new configuration activation. This command also clears port counters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except for the Clear keyword.  
set port [port_number]  
bypass [alpa]  
clear  
enable  
speed [transmission_speed]  
state [state]  
Keywords [port_number]  
Specifies the port. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
bypass [alpa]  
Sends a Loop Port Bypass (LPB) to a specific Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
(ALPA) or to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop. [alpa] can be a specific ALPA or the  
keyword ALL to choose all ALPAs.  
clear  
Clears the counters on the port. This keyword does not require an admin session.  
enable  
Sends a Loop Port Enable (LPE) to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop.  
speed [transmission_speed]  
Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port. Choose one of the  
following port speed values:  
1Gb/s  
One gigabit per second.  
2Gb/s  
Two gigabits per second.  
4Gb/s  
Four gigabits per second  
Auto  
The port speed is automatically detected.  
59226-00 B  
A-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Port Command  
S
state [state]  
Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port:  
Online  
Places the port online. This activates and prepares the port to send data.  
Offline  
Places the port offline. This prevents the port from receiving signal and  
accepting a device login.  
Diagnostics  
Prepares the port for testing. This prepares the port for testing and prevents  
the port from accepting a device login.  
Down  
Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers.  
A-56  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
A
Set Setup Command  
Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. The switch maintains one  
SNMP configuration and one system configuration.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
set setup  
snmp  
system  
Keywords snmp  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change SNMP configuration settings.  
Table A-13 describes the SNMP fields. For each parameter, enter a new value or  
press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-13. SNMP Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
SNMPEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP on the switch. The  
default is True.  
Contact  
Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to  
trap events. The name can be up to 64 characters excluding #,  
semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is undefined.  
Location  
Specifies the name of the switch location. The name can be up  
to 64 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,).  
The default is undefined.  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Specifies the workstation IP address to which SNMP traps are  
sent. The default address for trap 1 is 10.0.0.254. The default  
address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0. Addresses, other than 0.0.0.0,  
for all traps must be unique.  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Specifies the workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent.  
Valid workstation port numbers are 1–65535. The default is  
162.  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
Specifies the severity level to use when monitoring trap events.  
The default is Warning  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) to use in formatting traps.  
The default is 2.  
Specifies whether traps (event information) are enabled or dis-  
abled (default).  
59226-00 B  
A-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
S
Table A-13. SNMP Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Entry  
ReadCommunity  
Description  
Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
read information from the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The read community password can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The  
default is “public”.  
WriteCommunity  
TrapCommunity  
Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
write information to the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The write community password can be up to 32  
characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The  
default is “private”.  
Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch  
and the SNMP management server must be the same. The  
trap community password can be up to 32 characters excluding  
#, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is “public”.  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation of traps in  
response to trap authentication failures. The default is False.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP communication with  
other switches in the fabric. The default is True.  
system  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change system configuration settings.  
Table A-14 describes the system configuration fields. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
NOTE:  
Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management  
sessions.  
Table A-14. System Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Ethernet boot method: 1 - Static, 2 - Bootp, 3 - DHCP,  
4 - RARP. The default is 1 - Static.  
Ethernet Internet Protocol (IP) address. The default is  
10.0.0.1.  
A-58  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
A
Table A-14. System Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
Ethernet subnet mask address.  
Ethernet IP address gateway.  
Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before ter-  
minating an idle Admin session. Zero (0) disables the  
time out threshold. The default is 30, the maximum is  
1440.  
InactivityTimeout  
Amount of time in minutes the switch waits before ter-  
minating an idle Telnet command line interface ses-  
sion. Zero (0) disables the time out threshold. The  
default is 0, the maximum is 1440.  
LocalLogEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of log  
information on the switch. The default is True.  
RemoteLogEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the recording of  
the switch event log on a remote host that supports  
the syslog protocol. The default is False.  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
The IP address of the host that will receive the switch  
event log information if remote logging is enabled.  
The default is 10.0.0.254.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the Network Time  
Protocol (NTP) client on the switch. This client  
enables the switch to synchronize its time with an  
NTP server. This feature supports NTP version 4 and  
is compatible with version 3. An Ethernet connection  
to the server is required and you must first set an ini-  
tial time and date on the switch. The synchronized  
time becomes effective immediately. The default is  
False.  
NTPServerAddress  
The IP address of the NTP server from which the  
NTP client acquires the time and date. The default is  
10.0.0.254.  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the SANsurfer  
Switch Manager Web applet. Changing this parame-  
ter to False while the applet is running will terminate  
the applet. The default is True.  
59226-00 B  
A-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
S
Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup SNMP command:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> set setup snmp  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Trap Severity Options  
---------------------  
unknown, emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notify, info, debug, mark  
SNMPEnabled  
Contact  
(True / False)  
[True  
]
(string, max=64 chars)  
(string, max=64 chars)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[<sysContact undefined]  
[sysLocation undefined]  
Location  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
[10.20.71.15  
[162  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ReadCommunity  
WriteCommunity  
TrapCommunity  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
[False  
[public  
[private  
[public  
[False  
[True  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
A-60  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
A
The following is an example of the Set Setup System command:  
SANbox (admin) #> set setup system  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
(1=Static, 2=Bootp, 3=Dhcp, 4=Rarp) [Static  
]
]
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
[10.0.0.1  
[255.255.255.0]  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
[10.0.0.254  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
(dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [30  
(dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [0  
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
(True / False)  
[True  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
NTPServerAddress  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
(True / False)  
[False  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(True / False)  
[10.0.0.254  
[False  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(True / False)  
[10.0.0.254  
[True  
59226-00 B  
A-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
Show Command  
Displays fabric, switch, and port operational information.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show  
about  
alarm [option]  
broadcast  
chassis  
config [option]  
domains  
donor  
fabric  
fdmi [port_wwn]  
interface  
log [option]  
lsdb  
mem [count]  
ns [option]  
pagebreak  
perf [option]  
port [port_number]  
post log  
setup [option]  
steering [domain_id]  
support  
switch  
timezone  
topology  
users  
version  
Keywords about  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the Version keyword.  
A-62  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
alarm [option]  
Displays the alarm log and session display setting. If you omit [option], the  
command displays the last 200 alarm entries. The alarm log is cleared when the  
switch is reset or power cycled. [option] has the following value:  
setting  
Displays the status of the parameter that controls the display of alarms in the  
session output stream. This parameter is set using the Set Alarm command.  
broadcast  
Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting  
and receiving broadcast frames.  
chassis  
Displays chassis component status and temperature.  
config [option]  
Displays switch, port, and zoning configuration attributes. Refer to the “Show  
domains  
Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric.  
donor  
Displays list of current donor configuration for all ports.  
fabric  
Displays list of each domain, symbolic name, worldwide name, node IP address,  
and port IP address.  
fdmi [port_wwn]  
Displays detailed information about the device host bus adapter given by  
[port_wwn]. If you omit [port_wwn], the command displays a summary of host bus  
adapter information for all attached devices in the fabric. Illegal characters in the  
display appear as question marks (?).  
interface  
Displays the status of the active network interfaces.  
log [option]  
Displays log entries. Refer to the “Show Log Command” on page A-81. The log is  
cleared when the switch is reset or power cycled.  
59226-00 B  
A-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
lsdb  
Displays Link State database information  
mem [count]  
Displays information about memory activity for the number of seconds given by  
[count]. If you omit [count], the value 1 is used. Displayed memory values are in  
1K block units.  
NOTE:  
This keyword will display memory activity updates until [count] is  
reached – it cannot be interrupted. Therefore, avoid using large  
values for [count].  
ns [option]  
Displays name server information for the specified [option]. If you omit [option],  
name server information for the local domain ID is displayed. [option] can have the  
following values:  
all  
Displays name server information for all switches and ports.  
[domain_id]  
Displays name server information for the switch given by [domain_id].  
[domain_id] is a switch domain ID.  
[port_id]  
Displays name server information for the port given by [port_id]. [port_id] is a  
port Fibre Channel address.  
pagebreak  
Displays the current pagebreak setting. The pagebreak setting limits the display of  
information to 20 lines (On) or allows the continuous display of information without  
a break (Off).  
perf [option]  
Displays performance information for all ports. Refer to the “Show Perf Command”  
A-64  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
port [port_number]  
Displays operational information for the port given by [port_number]. Ports are  
numbered beginning with 0. If [port number] is omitted, information is displayed for  
all ports. Table A-15 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters  
Entry  
Description  
AIinit  
Incremented each time the port begins AL initialization.  
AIinitError  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the initial-  
ization failed.  
Bad Frames  
Number of frames that have framing errors.  
Number of class x frames received by this port.  
Number of class x frames sent by this port.  
Number of class x words received by this port.  
Number of class x words sent by this port.  
ClassXFramesIn  
ClassXFramesOut  
ClassXWordsIn  
ClassXWordsOut  
ClassXToss  
Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from  
TBUF.  
DecodeError  
EpConnects  
Number of decode errors detected  
Number of times an E_Port connected through ISL negotia-  
tion.  
FBusy  
Number of times the switch sent a F_BSY because Class 2  
frame could not be delivered within ED_TOV time. Number of  
class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames generated by  
this port in response to incoming frames. This usually indi-  
cates a busy condition on the fabric or N_Port that is prevent-  
ing delivery of this frame.  
Flowerrors  
Received a frame when there were no available credits.  
Number of frames from devices that were rejected.  
Invalid CRC detected.  
FReject  
InvalidCRC  
InvalidDestAddr  
LIP_AL_PD_ALPS  
Invalid destination address detected.  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific)  
resets, performed.  
LIP_F7_AL_PS  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_Port, identified  
by AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and  
is trying to restore the loop.  
59226-00 B  
A-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
LIP_F8_AL_PS  
LIP_F7_F7  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_Port identi-  
fied by AL_PS.  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid  
AL_PA.  
LIP_F8_F7  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop  
failure has been detected at the receiver.  
Link Failures  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link fail-  
ure is a loss of synchronization or a loss of signal while not in  
the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt  
to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established, a link  
failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link failure.  
Login  
Number of device logins  
Logout  
Number of device logouts  
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
A two (2) second timeout as specified by FC-AL-2.  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
Primitive sequence errors detected.  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
RxOfflineSeq  
Number of offline sequences received. An OLS is issued for  
link initialization, a Receive & Recognize Not_Operational  
(NOS) state, or to enter the offline state.  
TotalErrors  
Total number of errors detected.  
TotalLIPsRecvd  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this  
port.  
TotalLIPsXmitd  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by  
this port.  
TotalLinkResets  
TotalOfflineSeq  
Total number of link reset primitives.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued and received by  
this port.  
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
Total number of frames received by this port.  
Total number of words received by this port.  
A-66  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
Total number of frames issued by this port.  
Total number of words issued by this port.  
Number of Link Resets issued by this port.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port.  
post log  
Displays the Power On Self Test (POST) log which contains results from the most  
recently failed POST.  
setup [option]  
Displays setup attributes for the system, SNMP, and the switch manufacturer.  
steering [domain_id]  
Displays the routes that data takes to the switch given by [domain_id]. If you omit  
[domain_id], the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric.  
59226-00 B  
A-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
support  
Executes a series of commands that display a complete description of the switch,  
its configuration, and operation. The display can be captured from the screen and  
used for diagnosing problems. This keyword is intended for use at the request of  
your authorized maintenance provider. The commands that are executed include  
the following:  
Alias List  
Config List  
Date  
History  
Ps  
Show (About, Alarm, Backtrace, Chassis, Config Port, Config Switch, Config  
Threshold, Dev, Dev Settings, Domains, Donor, Fabric, Log, Log Archive,  
Log Settings, Lsdb, Mem, Ns, Perf, Port, Setup Mfg, Setup Snmp, Setup  
System, Steering, Switch, Topology, Users)  
Uptime  
User Accounts  
Whoami  
Zoneset (Active, List)  
Zoning (History, Limits, List)  
switch  
Displays switch operational information.Table A-16 describes the switch  
operational parameters.  
Table A-16. Switch Operational Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SymbolicName  
SwitchWWN  
SwitchType  
BootVersion  
CreditPool  
Descriptive name for the switch  
Switch world wide name  
Switch model  
PROM boot version  
Number of port buffer credits available to  
recipient ports  
DomainID  
Switch domain ID  
FirstPortAddress  
FC address of switch port 0  
Size of the flash memory in megabytes  
FlashSize - MBytes  
A-68  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
Table A-16. Switch Operational Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
LogLevel  
MaxPorts  
Event severity level used to record events  
in the event log  
Number of ports available on the switch  
NumberOfResets  
Number of times the switch has been reset  
over its service life  
ReasonForLastReset  
Action that caused the last reset  
ActiveImageVersion - build date  
Active firmware image version and build  
date.  
PendingImageVersion - build date  
ActiveConfiguration  
Firmware image version and build date  
that is pending. This image will become  
active at the next reset or power cycle.  
Name of the switch configuration that is in  
use.  
AdminState  
Switch administrative state  
Admin session status  
AdminModeActive  
BeaconOnStatus  
Beacon status as set by the Set Beacon  
command.  
OperationalState  
Switch operational state  
PrincipalSwitchRole  
Principal switch status. True indicates that  
this switch is the principal switch.  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
Internal switch temperature at circuit board  
sensor 1  
SwitchDiagnosticsStatus  
SwitchTemperatureStatus  
Results of the power-on self test  
Switch temperature status: normal, warn-  
ing, failure  
topology  
Displays all connected devices.  
timezone  
Displays the current time zone setting.  
users  
Displays a list of logged-in users. This is equivalent to the User List command.  
59226-00 B  
A-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
version  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the About keyword.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Chassis command:  
SANbox #> show chassis  
Chassis Information  
-------------------  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
PowerSupplyStatus (1)  
HeartBeatCode  
23  
Good  
1
HeartBeatStatus  
Normal  
The following is an example of the Show Domains command:  
SANbox #> show domains  
Principal switch is (remote): 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
Upstream Principal ISL is  
Domain ID List:  
: 1  
Domain 97 (0x61) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
Domain 103 (0x67) WWN = 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
The following is an example of the Show Fabric command:  
SANbox #> show fabric  
Domain  
------  
WWN  
---  
Enet IP Addr  
------------  
FC IP Addr  
----------  
0.0.0.0  
SymbolicName  
------------  
gui sb1 .11  
sw12  
16 (0x10) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:77:81 10.20.68.11  
17 (0x11) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:6a:2d 10.20.68.12  
0.0.0.0  
The following is an example of the Show FDMI command:  
SANbox #> show fdmi  
HBA ID  
PortID Manufacturer  
Model  
-------  
QLA2342  
QL2330  
Ports  
--------  
------ ---------------  
-----  
21:01:00:e0:8b:27:aa:bc 610000 QLogic Corporation  
21:00:00:00:ca:25:9b:96 180100 QLogic Corporation  
2
2
A-70  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
The following is an example of the Show FDMI WWN command:  
SANbox #> show fdmi 21:00:00:e0:8b:09:3b:17  
FDMI Information  
----------------  
Manufacturer  
SerialNumber  
Model  
QLogic Corporation  
[04202  
QLA2342  
ModelDescription  
PortID  
QLogic QLA2342 PCI Fibre Channel Adapter  
610000  
NodeWWN  
20:00:00:e0:8b:07:aa:bc  
HardwareVersion  
DriverVersion  
OptionRomVersion  
FirmwareVersion  
OperatingSystem  
MaximumCTPayload  
NumberOfPorts  
FC5010409-10  
8.2.3.10 Beta 2 (W2K VI)  
1.21  
03.02.13.  
SunOS 5.8  
2040  
1
Port 21:01:00:e0:8b:27:aa:bc  
SupportedFC4Types  
SupportedSpeed  
CurrentSpeed  
MaximumFrameSize  
OSDeviceName  
HostName  
FCP  
2Gb/s  
2Gb/s  
2048  
The following is an example of the Show NS (local domain) command:  
SANbox #> show ns  
Seq Domain  
No ID  
Port  
ID  
Port  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
--- ------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
2
3
4
19 (0x13) 1301e1 NL  
3
3
3
3
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69 20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
21:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b 20:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b  
21:00:00:20:37:73:05:26 20:00:00:20:37:73:05:26  
21:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc 20:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc  
19 (0x13) 1301e2 NL  
19 (0x13) 1301e4 NL  
19 (0x13) 130d00 N  
59226-00 B  
A-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show NS [domain_ID] command:  
SANbox #> show ns 18  
Seq Domain Port  
No ID  
--- ------  
18 (0x12) 120700 N  
Port  
ID  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
3
21:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc 20:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc  
The following is an example of the Show NS [port_ID] command:  
SANbox #> show ns 1301e1  
Port ID: 1301e1  
--------  
PortType  
NL  
PortWWN  
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicPortName  
NodeWWN  
20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicNodeName  
NodeIPAddress  
ClassOfService  
PortIPAddress  
FabricPortName  
FC4Type  
0.0.0.0  
3
0.0.0.0  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56  
FCP  
FC4Desc  
(NULL)  
The following is an example of the Show Interface command:  
SANbox #> show interface  
eth0  
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:DD:00:BD:ED  
inet addr:10.20.68.107 Bcast:10.20.68.255 Mask:255.255.255.0  
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1  
RX packets:4712 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:3000 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100  
RX bytes:415313 (405.5 Kb) TX bytes:716751 (699.9 Kb)  
Interrupt:11 Base address:0xfcc0  
lo  
Link encap:Local Loopback  
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0  
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1  
RX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0  
RX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb) TX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb)  
A-72  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
The following is an example of the Show Port command:  
SANbox #> show port 1  
Port Number: 1  
------------  
AdminState  
AsicNumber  
AsicPort  
Online  
OperationalState Online  
0
PerfTuningMode  
PortID  
Normal  
1
0e0800  
ConfigType  
DiagStatus  
EpConnState  
EpIsoReason  
IOStreamGuard  
LinkSpeed  
GL  
PortWWN  
20:08:00:c0:dd:03:d5:94  
E
Passed  
Connected  
NotApplicable  
Disabled  
2Gb/s  
RunningType  
MediaPartNumber PL-XPL-VC-SG3-22  
MediaRevision  
MediaType  
1
200-M5-SN-I  
Unknown  
00000485  
Port8  
MediaVendor  
MediaVendorID  
SymbolicName  
SyncStatus  
LinkState  
Active  
LoggedIn  
8
LoginStatus  
MaxCredit  
SyncAcquired  
True  
MediaSpeeds  
1Gb/s, 2Gb/s, 4Gb/s XmitterEnabled  
ALInit  
5
0
0
LIP_F8_AL_PS  
LIP_F8_F7  
LinkFailures  
Login  
0
ALInitError  
BadFrames  
0
2
Class2FramesIn 0  
Class2FramesOut 0  
3
Logout  
2
Class2WordsIn  
0
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
1
Class2WordsOut 0  
2
Class3FramesIn 999  
Class3FramesOut 540  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
RxOfflineSeq  
TotalErrors  
0
1
Class3Toss  
0
0
Class3WordsIn  
29516  
628777  
Class3WordsOut 8406  
TotalLinkResets 6  
TotalLIPsRecvd 5  
TotalLIPsXmitd 7  
TotalOfflineSeq 5  
DecodeErrors  
EpConnects  
FBusy  
628775  
3
0
0
0
0
FlowErrors  
FReject  
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
999  
29516  
540  
8406  
5
InvalidCRC  
InvalidDestAddr 0  
LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS 0  
LIP_F7_AL_PS  
LIP_F7_F7  
0
5
5
59226-00 B  
A-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show Switch command:  
SANbox #> show switch  
Switch Information  
------------------  
SymbolicName  
sw .108  
SwitchWWN  
100000c0dd00bc56  
SANbox 1400  
SwitchType  
BootVersion  
Vx.x.x.x-0 (day month date time year)  
CreditPool  
0
DomainID  
19 (0x13)  
FirstPortAddress  
FlashSize - MBytes  
LogLevel  
130000  
128  
Critical  
MaxPorts  
10  
NumberOfResets  
ReasonForLastReset  
ActiveImageVersion - build date  
15  
PowerUp  
Vx.x.x.0-2 (day month date time year)  
PendingImageVersion - build date Vx.x.x.0-17 (day month date time year)  
ActiveConfiguration  
AdminState  
default  
Online  
False  
False  
Online  
False  
32  
AdminModeActive  
BeaconOnStatus  
OperationalState  
PrincipalSwitchRole  
BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius  
SwitchDiagnosticsStatus  
SwitchTemperatureStatus  
Passed  
Normal  
The following is an example of the Show Topology command:  
SANbox #> show topology  
Unique ID Key  
-------------  
A = ALPA, D = Domain ID, P = Port ID  
Port  
Local Local  
Remote Remote  
Type NodeWWN  
------ -------  
Unique  
ID  
Number Type PortWWN  
------ ----- -------  
------  
010500 P  
4(0x4) D  
5
F
E
20:05:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
20:0a:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
N
E
20:00:00:00:c9:22:1e:93  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:80:21  
10  
A-74  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
A
The following is an example of the Show Topology command for port 1:  
SANbox #> show topology 1  
Local Link Information  
----------------------  
PortNumber 1  
PortID  
650100  
PortWWN  
PortType  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:91:11  
F
Remote Link Information  
-----------------------  
Device 0  
NodeWWN 50:80:02:00:00:06:d5:38  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 1  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:08:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 2  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 3  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:05:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
59226-00 B  
A-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show Version command:  
SANbox #> show version  
*****************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
Command Line Interface SHell (CLISH)  
*****************************************************  
SystemDescription  
SANbox 1400 FC Switch  
Eth0NetworkAddress 10.20.116.37 (use 'set setup system' to update)  
MACAddress  
00:c0:dd:07:02:17  
WorldWideName  
10:00:00:c0:dd:07:02:17  
ChassisSerialNumber 0447000039  
SymbolicName  
SB1400.116.37  
V5.0.1.2.0  
ActiveSWVersion  
ActiveTimestamp  
DiagnosticsStatus  
Mon Dec 12 22:44:25 2005  
Passed  
A-76  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
A
Show Config Command  
Displays switch, port, alarm threshold, and zoning for the current configuration.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show config  
port [port_number]  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords port [port_number]  
Displays configuration parameters for the port number given by [port_number].  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0. If [port_number] is omitted, all ports are  
specified.  
switch  
Displays configuration parameters for the switch.  
threshold  
Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch.  
zoning  
Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch.  
59226-00 B  
A-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
S
Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Port command:  
SANbox #> show config port 3  
Port Number: 3  
------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
Offline  
Auto  
GL  
SymbolicName  
ALFairness  
Port3  
False  
DeviceScanEnabled True  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
ARB_FF  
False  
False  
0
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnabled  
AutoPerfTuning  
LCFEnabled  
MFSEnabled  
MSEnabled  
True  
False  
False  
True  
True  
False  
Disabled  
False  
True  
NoClose  
IOStreamGuard  
VIEnabled  
PDISCPingEnable  
The following is an example of the Show Config Switch command:  
SANbox #> show config switch  
Configuration Name: default  
-------------------  
Switch Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
AdminState  
Online  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
FDMIEnabled  
False  
True  
False  
FDMIEntries  
10  
DomainID  
19 (0x13)  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
True  
sw108  
10000  
E_D_TOV  
2000  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
ConfigLastSavedBy  
ConfigLastSavedOn  
InteropMode  
254  
Default Config  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
Standard  
A-78  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
A
The following is an example of the Show Config Threshold command:  
SANbox #> show config threshold  
Configuration Name: default  
------------  
Threshold Configuration Information  
-----------------------------------  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
False  
True  
25  
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True  
RisingTrigger  
25  
0
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
True  
2
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
0
10  
True  
5
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
5
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
100  
5
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
59226-00 B  
A-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show Config Zoning command:  
SANbox #> show config zoning  
Configuration Name: default  
-------------------  
Zoning Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
InteropAutoSave  
DefaultVisibility  
DiscardInactive  
True  
All  
False  
A-80  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
A
Show Log Command  
Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create and display  
entries in the log. The log contains a maximum of 1200 entries. When the log  
reaches its entry capacity, subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries,  
beginning with the oldest.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show log  
[number of events]  
component  
display [filter]  
level  
options  
port  
settings  
Keywords [number of events]  
Specifies the number of the most recent events to display from the event log.  
[number of events] must be a positive integer.  
component  
Displays the components currently being monitored for events. The components  
are as follows:  
All  
Monitors all components.  
Chassis  
Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies.  
Eport  
Monitors all E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Monitors management server status.  
Nameserver  
Monitors name server status.  
None  
Monitor none of the component events.  
59226-00 B  
A-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
S
Other  
Monitors other miscellaneous events.  
Port  
Monitors all port events  
SNMP  
SNMP events.  
Switch  
Monitors switch management events.  
Zoning  
Monitors zoning conflict events.  
display [filter]  
Displays log events on the screen according to the component or severity level  
filter given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following:  
Info  
Displays all informative events.  
Warning  
Displays all warning events.  
Critical  
Displays all critical events.  
Eport  
Displays all events related to E_Ports.  
Mgmtserver  
Displays all events related to the management server.  
Nameserver  
Displays all events related to the name server.  
Port [port_number]  
Displays all events related to the port given by [port_number].  
SNMP  
Displays all events related to SNMP.  
A-82  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
A
Switch  
Displays all events related to switch management.  
Zoning  
Displays all events related to zoning.  
level  
Displays the event severity level logging setting and the display level setting.  
options  
Displays the options that are available for configuring event logging and automatic  
display to the screen. Refer to the for information about how to configure event  
logging and display level.  
port  
Displays the ports being monitored for events. If an event occurs which is of the  
defined level and on a defined component, but not on a defined port, no entry is  
made in the log.  
settings  
Displays the current filter settings for component, severity level, port, and display  
level. This command is equivalent to executing the following commands  
separately: Show Log Component, Show Log Level, and Show Log Port.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Log Component command:  
SANbox #> show log component  
Current settings for log  
------------------------  
FilterComponent  
NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp  
The following is an example of the Show Log Level command:  
SANbox #> show log level  
Current settings for log  
------------------------  
FilterLevel  
DisplayLevel  
Info  
Critical  
The following is an example of the Show Log Options command:  
SANbox #> show log options  
Allowed options for log  
-----------------------  
FilterComponent  
All,None,NameServer,MgmtServer,Zoning,Switch,Blade,Port,Eport,Snmp  
FilterLevel  
DisplayLevel  
Critical,Warn,Info,None  
Critical,Warn,Info,None  
59226-00 B  
A-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show Log command:  
SANbox #> show log  
[327][day month date time year][I][Eport Port:0/8][Eport State=  
E_A0_GET_DOMAIN_ID]  
[328][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][FSPF PortUp state=0]  
[329][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending init hello]  
[330][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Processing EFP, oxid= 0x8]  
[331][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Eport State = E_A2_IDLE]  
[332][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][EFP,WWN= 0x100000c0dd00b845,  
len= 0x30]  
[333][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending LSU oxid=0xc:type=1]  
[334][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Send Zone Merge Request]  
[335][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][LSDB Xchg timer set]  
[336][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Setting attribute  
Oper.UserPort.0.8.EpConnState Connected]  
A-84  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
A
Show Perf Command  
Displays port performance in frames/second and bytes/second. If you omit the  
keyword, the command displays data transmitted (out), data received (in), and  
total data transmitted and received in frames/second and bytes per second.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show perf  
byte  
inbyte  
outbyte  
frame  
inframe  
outframe  
errors  
Keywords byte  
Displays continuous performance data in total bytes/second transmitted and  
received for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
inbyte  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second received for all ports. Type  
“q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
outbyte  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second transmitted for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
frame  
Displays continuous performance data in total frames/second transmitted and  
received for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
inframe  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second received for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
outframe  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second transmitted for all ports.  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
errors  
Displays continuous error counts for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to  
stop the display.  
59226-00 B  
A-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
S
Examples The following is an example of the Show Perf command:  
SANbox #> show perf  
Port  
Number  
------ -------  
Bytes/s  
Bytes/s  
(out)  
Bytes/s  
(total)  
Frames/s  
(in)  
Frames/s  
Frames/s  
(in)  
(out)  
(total)  
-------  
-------  
136M  
58K  
0
--------  
--------  
--------  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7K  
58K  
0
136M  
0
245  
1K  
0
68K  
0
68K  
1K  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7K  
58K  
136M  
0
7K  
0
245  
1K  
68K  
0
245  
70K  
68K  
1K  
136M  
7K  
58K  
136M  
136M  
58K  
68K  
245  
1K  
The following is an example of the Show Perf Byte command:  
SANbox $> show perf byte  
Displaying bytes/sec data... (Press any key to stop display)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
76M 0  
78M 0  
78M 0  
77M 0  
77M 0  
84M 0  
83M 0  
80M 0  
77M 0  
78M 0  
75M 0  
74M 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
22M 0  
24M 0  
24M 0  
23M 0  
23M 0  
30M 0  
29M 0  
25M 0  
23M 0  
23M 0  
19M 0  
18M 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
33M  
33M  
33M  
34M  
34M  
33M  
33M  
35M  
34M  
34M  
35M  
36M  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20  
21  
21  
20  
20  
21  
21  
20  
20  
21  
21  
21  
q
A-86  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
A
Show Setup Command  
Displays the current SNMP and system settings.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
show setup  
mfg  
snmp  
system  
Keywords mfg  
Displays manufacturing information about the switch.  
snmp  
Displays the current SNMP settings.  
system  
Displays the current system settings.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Mfg command:  
SANbox #> show setup mfg  
Manufacturing Information  
-------------------------  
BrandName  
QLogic Corporation  
Unknown  
BuildDate  
PartNumber  
SANbox 1400  
SerialNumber  
LicensedPorts  
MACAddress  
FAM0331000011  
10  
00:c0:dd:02:cc:17  
Unknown  
PlanarPartNumber  
SwitchSymbolicName  
SwitchWWN  
SANbox  
10:00:00:c0:dd:02:cc:16  
SANbox 1400 FC Switch  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.27  
SystemDescription  
SystemObjectID  
59226-00 B  
A-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
S
The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp command:  
SANbox #> show setup snmp  
SNMP Information  
----------------  
SNMPEnabled  
Contact  
True  
<sysContact undefined>  
Location  
N_107 System Test Lab  
Description  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
SANbox 1400 FC Switch  
10.0.0.254  
162  
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ObjectID  
warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.27  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
True  
True  
A-88  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
A
The following is an example of the Show Setup System command:  
SANbox #> show setup system  
System Information  
------------------  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Static  
10.20.11.32  
255.255.252.0  
10.20.8.254  
30  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
InactivityTimeout  
LocalLogEnabled  
0
True  
RemoteLogEnabled  
False  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
NTPClientEnabled  
10.0.0.254  
True  
NTPServerAddress  
51.68.85.102  
True  
EmbeddedGUIEnabled  
59226-00 B  
A-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Shutdown Command  
S
Shutdown Command  
Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the  
Telnet session. Always power cycle the switch after entering this command.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Notes  
Admin session  
shutdown  
Always use this command to perform an orderly shut down before removing  
power from the switch.  
When the shutdown is complete, the Heartbeat LED is extinguished.  
A-90  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
A
Test Command  
Tests ports using internal (SerDes level), external (transceiver), and online  
loopback tests. Internal and external tests require that the port be placed in  
diagnostic mode. Refer to the “Set Command” on page A-37 for information about  
changing the port administrative state. While the test is running, the remaining  
ports on the switch remain fully operational.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session  
test  
port [port_number] [test_type]  
cancel  
status  
Keywords port [port_number] [test_type]  
Tests the port given by [port_number] using the test given by [test_type]. If you  
omit [test_type], Internal is used. [test_type] can have the following values:  
internal  
Tests the SerDes for all port speeds independent of the capabilities of the  
transceiver. This is the default. The port must be in diagnostics mode to  
perform this test.  
external  
Tests both the SerDes and transceiver for all port speeds that are supported  
by the transceiver. The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test,  
and a loopback plug must be installed in the transceiver.  
online  
Tests communications between the port and its device node or device loop  
at the operating port speed. The port being tested must be online and  
connected to a remote device. The port passes if the test frame that was  
sent by the ASIC matches the frame that is received. This test does not  
disrupt communication on the port.  
cancel  
Cancels the online test in progress.  
status  
Displays the status of a test in progress, or if there is no test in progress, the  
status of the test that was executed last.  
59226-00 B  
A-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
S
Examples To run an internal or external port test, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
Place the port in Diagnostics mode, enter the following command (x = port  
number) and press the Enter key.  
set port x state diagnostics  
Choose the type of port loopback test to run:  
To run an internal loopback test, enter the following:  
test port x internal  
To run an external loopback test, enter the following command. A  
loopback plug must be installed for this test to pass.  
test port x external  
4.  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload.  
5.  
6.  
After the test type has been chosen and the command executed, a message  
on the screen will appear detailing the test results.  
After the test is run, put the port back into online state by entering the  
following command (x = port number) and pressing the Enter key.  
set port x state online  
7.  
To verify port is back online, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key. The contents of the AdminState field should display be “Online”.  
show port x  
The online loopback (node-to-node) test requires that port be online and  
connected to a remote device. To run the online loopback test, do the following:  
1.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
2.  
To run the online loopback test, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key.  
test port x online  
A-92  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
A
3.  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload. Before running the test, make sure  
that the device attached to the port can handle the test parameters.  
SANbox (admin) #> test port x online  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will  
follow. Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to  
accept the default value. If you wish to terminate this  
process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q'  
and the ENTER key to do so.  
TestLength  
FrameSize  
(decimal value, 1-4294967295) [100  
(decimal value, 36-2148) [256  
]
]
DataPattern (32-bit hex value or 'Default') [Default]  
StopOnError (True/False)  
[False ]  
Do you want to start the test? (y/n) [n]  
4.  
After all parameter values are defined, press the Y key to start the test. After  
the command executes, a message on the screen will appear detailing the  
test results.  
59226-00 B  
A-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Uptime Command  
S
Uptime Command  
Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and reset method. A  
hot reset or non-disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time  
reported by this command.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
uptime  
Examples The following is an example of the Uptime command:  
SANbox #> uptime  
Elapsed up time : 0 day(s), 2 hour(s), 28 min(s), 44 sec(s)  
Reason last reset: NormalReset  
A-94  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
A
User Command  
Administers and displays user accounts.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin account name and an Admin session. The Accounts and List keywords are  
available to all account names without an Admin session.  
user  
accounts  
add  
delete [account_name]  
edit  
list  
Keywords accounts  
Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch. This keyword is available to all  
account names without an Admin session.  
add  
Add a user account to the switch. You will be prompted for an account name, a  
password, authority, and an expiration date.  
A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts.  
Account names are limited to 15 characters; passwords must be 4–20  
characters.  
Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an  
admin session, from which all commands can be entered. Without Admin  
authority, you are limited to view-only commands.  
The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account  
expires (2000 maximum). The switch will issue an expiration alarm every  
day for seven days prior to expiration. 0 (zero) specifies that the account has  
no expiration date.  
delete [account_name]  
Deletes the account name given by [account_name] from the switch.  
edit  
Initiates an edit session that prompts you for the account name for which to  
change the expiration date and authority.  
list  
Displays the list of users currently logged in and their session numbers. Provides  
the same function as the Show Users command. This keyword is available to all  
account names without an Admin session.  
59226-00 B  
A-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
S
Notes  
Authority level or password changes that you make to an account that is currently  
logged in do not take effect until that account logs in again.  
Examples The following is an example of the User Accounts command:  
SANbox (admin) #> user accounts  
Current list of user accounts  
-----------------------------  
images  
admin  
chuckca  
gregj  
fred  
(admin authority = False, never expires)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
(admin authority = False, expires in < 50 days)  
(admin authority = True , expires in < 100 days)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
The following is an example of the User Add command:  
SANbox (admin) #> user add  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account name (1-15 chars)  
: user1  
account password (4-20 chars) : *******  
please confirm account password: *******  
set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0] 100  
should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n] y  
OK to add user account 'user1' with admin authority  
and to expire in 100 days?  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User Edit command:  
SB211.192 (admin) #> user edit  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account name (1-15 chars)  
: user1  
set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0]  
should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n]  
OK to modify user account 'user1' with no admin authority  
and to expire in 0 days?  
Please confirm (y/n): [n]  
A-96  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
A
The following is an example of the User Delete command:  
SANbox (admin) #> user del user3  
The user account will be deleted. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User List command:  
SANbox (admin) #> user list  
User  
Ethernet Addr-Port  
------------------  
10.20.68.108-1031  
10.20.68.108-1034  
Unknown  
Logged in Since  
----  
---------------  
admin@OB-session1  
admin@OB-session2  
snmp@OB-session3  
snmp@IB-session4  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
Unknown  
Unknown  
59226-00 B  
A-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Whoami Command  
S
Whoami Command  
Displays the account name, session number, and switch domain ID for the Telnet  
session.  
Authority  
Syntax  
None  
whoami  
Examples The following is an example of the Whoami command:  
SANbox #> whoami  
User name  
: admin@session2  
: SANbox  
Switch name  
Switch domain ID: 21 (0x15)  
A-98  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
A
Zone Command  
Manages zones and zone membership on a switch.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the “Zoning Command” on  
page A-106 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The List,  
Members, and Zonesets keywords are available without an Admin session.  
zone  
add [zone] [member_list]  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
create [zone]  
delete [zone]  
list  
members [zone]  
remove [zone] [member_list]  
rename [zone_old [zone_new]  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
zonesets [zone]  
Keywords add [zone] [member_list]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [members] to add to the zone  
named [zone]. Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in  
[member_list]. A zone can have a maximum of 2000 members. [member_list] can  
have any of the following formats:  
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–239; port numbers can be 0–255.  
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
Alias name  
The application verifies that the [members] format is correct, but does not validate  
that such a member exists.  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
Creates a new zone named [zone_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the zone given by [zone_source].  
create [zone]  
Creates a zone with the name given by [zone]. An zone name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 1000 zones.  
59226-00 B  
A-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
S
delete [zone]  
Deletes the specified zone given by [zone] from the zoning database. If the zone  
is a component of the active zone set, the zone will not be removed from the  
active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
list  
Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are components. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
members [zone]  
Displays all members of the zone given by [zone]. This keyword does not require  
an Admin session.  
remove [zone] [member_list]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the zone given by [zone].  
Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in [member_list].  
[member_list] can have any of the following formats:  
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can  
be 1–239; port numbers can be 0–255.  
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
Alias name  
rename [zone_old] [zone_new]  
Renames the zone given by [zone_old] to the zone given by [zone_new].  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
Specifies the zone type given by [zone_type] to be assigned to the zone name  
given by [zone]. If you omit the [zone_type], the system displays the zone type for  
the zone given by [zone]. [zone_type] can be one of the following:  
soft – name server zone  
hardACL – Access control list hard zone. This keyword is case sensitive.  
zonesets [zone]  
Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by [zone] is a component. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
A-100  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
A
Examples The following is an example of the Zone List command:  
SANbox #> zone list  
Zone  
ZoneSet  
-------------------  
wwn_b0241f  
zone_set_1  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
wwn_0160ed  
wwn_c001b0  
wwn_401248  
wwn_02402f  
wwn_22412f  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
The following is an example of the Zone Members command:  
SANbox #> zone members wwn_b0241f  
Current List of Members for Zone: wwn_b0241f  
---------------------------------  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
59226-00 B  
A-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
S
The following is an example of the Zone Zonesets command:  
SANbox #> zone zonesets zone1  
Current List of ZoneSets for Zone: zone1  
----------------------------------  
zone_set_1  
A-102  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
A
Zoneset Command  
Manages zone sets and component zones across the fabric.  
Authority  
Admin session and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the “Zoning Command” on  
page A-106 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The Active, List,  
and Zones keywords are available without an Admin session. You must close the  
Zoning Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords.  
Syntax  
zoneset  
activate [zone_set]  
active  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
create [zone_set]  
deactivate  
delete [zone_set]  
list  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
zones [zone_set]  
Keywords activate [zone_set]  
Activates the zone set given by [zone_set]. This keyword deactivates the active  
zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword.  
active  
Displays the name of the active zone set. This keyword does not require Admin  
session.  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Adds a list of zones and aliases given by [zone_list] to the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Use a <space> to delimit zone and alias names in [zone_list].  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
Creates a new zone set named [zone_set_destination] and copies into it the  
zones from the zone set given by [zone_set_source].  
create [zone_set]  
Creates the zone set with the name given by [zone_set]. A zone set name must  
begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9,  
A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 zone  
sets.  
59226-00 B  
A-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
S
deactivate  
Deactivates the active zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this  
keyword.  
delete [zone_set]  
Deletes the zone set given by [zone_set]. If the specified zone set is active, the  
command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated.  
list  
Displays a list of all zone sets. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Removes a list of zones given by [zone_list] from the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Use a <space> to delimit zone names in [zone_list]. If [zone_set] is the  
active zone set, the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been  
deactivated.  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
Renames the zone set given by [zone_set_old] to the name given by  
[zone_set_new]. You can rename the active zone set.  
zones [zone_set]  
Displays all zones that are components of the zone set given by [zone_set]. This  
keyword does not require an Admin session.  
Notes  
A zone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric.  
Only one zone set can be active at one time.  
A zone can be a component of more than one zone set.  
Examples The following is an example of the Zoneset Active command:  
SANbox #> zoneset active  
ActiveZoneSet  
Bets  
LastActivatedBy admin@OB-session6  
LastActivatedOn day month date time year  
The following is an example of the Zoneset List command:  
SANbox #> zoneset list  
Current List of ZoneSets  
------------------------  
alpha  
beta  
A-104  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
A
The following is an example of the Zoneset Zones command:  
SANbox #> zoneset zones ssss  
Current List of Zones for ZoneSet: ssss  
----------------------------------  
zone1  
zone2  
zone3  
59226-00 B  
A-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
S
Zoning Command  
Opens a Zoning Edit session in which to create and manage zone sets and zones.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin session except for the Active, History, Limits, and List keywords.  
zoning  
active  
cancel  
clear  
edit  
history  
limits  
list  
restore  
save  
Keywords active  
Displays information for the active zone set including component zones and zone  
members. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
cancel  
Closes the current Zoning Edit session. Any unsaved changes are lost.  
clear  
Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning database.  
This keyword does not affect the non-volatile zoning database. However, if you  
enter the Zoning Clear command followed by the Zoning Save command, the  
non-volatile zoning database will be cleared from the switch.  
NOTE:  
The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch  
is the Reset Zoning command.  
edit  
Opens a Zoning Edit session.  
A-106  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
A
history  
Displays a history of zoning modifications. This keyword does not require an  
Admin session. History information includes the following:  
Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user who  
performed it  
Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user  
who made them.  
Checksum for the zoning database  
limits  
Displays the number of zone sets, zones, aliases, members per zone, members  
per alias, and total members in the zoning database. This keyword also displays  
the switch zoning database limits, excluding the active zone set, which are  
described in Table A-17. This keyword does not require an Admin session.  
Table A-17. Zoning Database Limits  
Limit  
MaxZoneSets  
Description  
Maximum number of zone sets (256)  
Maximum number of zones (2000)  
Maximum number of aliases (2500)  
MaxZones  
MaxAliases  
MaxTotalMembers  
Maximum number of zone and alias members (10000)  
that can be stored in the switch’s zoning database.  
MaxZonesInZoneSets  
Maximum number of zones that are components of zone  
sets (2000), excluding those in the orphan zone set, that  
can be stored in the switch’s zoning database. Each  
instance of a zone in a zone set counts toward this maxi-  
mum.  
MaxMembersPerZone  
MaxMembersPerAlias  
Maximum number of members in a zone (2000)  
Maximum number of members in an alias (2000)  
list  
Lists all fabric zoning definitions. This keyword does not require an Admin  
session.  
restore  
Reverts the changes to the zoning database that have been made during the  
current Zoning Edit session since the last Zoning Save command was entered.  
59226-00 B  
A-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
S
save  
Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session. The system will  
inform you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes. This  
does not apply if you entered the Zoning Clear command during the Zoning Edit  
session.  
Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Edit command:  
SANbox #> admin start  
SANbox (admin) #> zoning edit  
SANbox (admin-zoning) #>  
.
.
SANbox (admin-zoning) #> zoning cancel  
Zoning edit mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n]  
SANbox (admin) #> admin end  
y
A-108  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
A
The following is an example of the Zoning Limits command:  
SANbox #> zoning limits  
Zoning Attribute  
----------------  
MaxZoneSets  
Maximum  
-------  
256  
Current  
[Zoning Name]  
-------------  
-------  
6
MaxZones  
2000  
17  
1
MaxAliases  
2500  
MaxTotalMembers  
MaxZonesInZoneSets  
MaxMembersPerZone  
10000  
2000  
166  
19  
2000  
10  
23  
9
D_1_JBOD_1  
D_1_Photons  
D_2_JBOD1  
16  
5
D_2_NewJBOD_2  
E1JBOD1  
5
E2JBOD2  
3
LinkResetZone  
LinkResetZone2  
NewJBOD1  
3
8
8
NewJBOD2  
24  
8
Q_1Photon1  
Q_1_NewJBOD1  
Q_1_Photon_1  
Q_2_NewJBOD2  
ZoneAlias  
13  
21  
3
3
ZoneDomainPort  
ZoneFCAddr  
4
MaxMembersPerAlias  
2000  
2
AliasInAZone  
59226-00 B  
A-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
S
The following is an example of the Zoning List command:  
SANbox #> zoning list  
Active ZoneSet Information  
ZoneSet  
Zone  
ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:c3  
Configured Zoning Information  
ZoneSet  
Zone  
ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
A-110  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
A
59226-00 B  
A-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
S
Notes  
A-112  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Access Control List Zone  
Arbitrated Loop  
Access Control List zoning divides the  
fabric for purposes of controlling discovery  
and inbound traffic.  
A Fibre Channel topology where ports use  
arbitration to establish a point-to-point  
circuit.  
Active Zone Set  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA)  
The zone set that defines the current  
zoning for the fabric.  
A unique one-byte value assigned during  
loop initialization to each NL_Port on a  
loop.  
Active Firmware  
ASIC  
The firmware image on the switch that is in  
use.  
Application Specific Integrated Circuit  
Activity LED  
Auto Save  
A port LED that indicates when frames are  
entering or leaving the port.  
Zoning parameter that determines whether  
changes to the active zone set that a  
switch receives from other switches in the  
fabric will be saved to permanent memory  
on that switch.  
Administrative State  
State that determines the operating state  
of the port, I/O blade, or switch. The  
configured administrative state is stored in  
the switch configuration. The configured  
administrative state can be temporarily  
overridden using the command line  
interface.  
BootP  
A type of network server.  
Buffer Credit  
A measure of port buffer capacity equal to  
one frame.  
Alarm  
A message generated by the switch that  
specifically requests attention. Alarms are  
generated by several switch processes.  
Some alarms can be configured.  
Cascade Topology  
A fabric in which the switches are  
connected in series. If you connect the last  
switch back to the first switch, you create a  
cascade-with-a-loop topology.  
Alias  
A named set of ports or devices. An alias  
is not a zone, and can not have a zone or  
another alias as a member.  
Class 2 Service  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports wit h acknowledgment provided.  
AL_PA  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
59226-00 B  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Class 3 Service  
Fabric View File  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports without acknowledgment.  
A file containing a set of fabrics that were  
opened and saved during a previous  
SANsurfer Switch Manager session.  
Configured Zone Sets  
Fan Fail LED  
The zone sets stored on a switch  
excluding the active zone set.  
An LED that indicates that a cooling fan in  
the switch is operating below standard.  
Default Visibility  
Flash Memory  
Zoning parameter that determines the  
level of communication among  
ports/devices when there is no active zone  
set.  
Memory on the switch that contains the  
chassis control firmware.  
Frame  
Data unit consisting of a start-of-frame  
(SOF) delimiter, header, data payload,  
CRC, and an end-of-frame (EOF)  
delimiter.  
Domain ID  
User defined number that identifies the  
switch in the fabric.  
Event Log  
FRU  
Log of messages describing events that  
occur in the fabric.  
Field Replaceable Unit  
Heartbeat LED  
Expansion Port  
A chassis LED that indicates the status of  
the internal switch processor and the  
results of the Power-On Self-Test.  
E_Port that connects to another FC-SW-2  
compliant switch.  
Fabric Database  
Inactive Firmware  
The set of fabrics that have been opened  
during a SANsurfer Switch Manager  
session.  
The firmware image on the switch that is  
not in use.  
In-band Management  
Fabric Management Switch  
The ability to manage a switch through  
another switch over an inter-switch link.  
The switch through which the fabric is  
managed.  
Initiator  
Fabric Name  
The device that initiates a data exchange  
with a target device.  
User defined name associated with the file  
that contains user list data for the fabric.  
In-Order-Delivery  
Fabric Port  
A feature that requires that frames be  
received in the same order in which they  
were sent.  
An F_Port  
Glossary-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
Input Power LED  
MIB  
A chassis LED that indicates that the  
switch logic circuitry is receiving proper DC  
voltages.  
Management Information Base  
Multistage Topology  
A fabric in which two or more edge  
switches connect to one or more core  
switches.  
Inter-Switch Link  
The connection between two switches  
using E_Ports.  
NL_Port  
IP  
Node Loop Port. A Fibre Channel device  
port that supports arbitrated loop protocol.  
Internet Protocol  
LIP  
N_Port  
Loop Initialization Primitive sequence  
Node Port. A Fibre Channel device port in  
a point-to-point or fabric connection.  
Logged-in LED  
Pending Firmware  
A port LED that indicates device login or  
loop initialization status.  
The firmware image that will be activated  
upon the next switch reset.  
Maintenance Button  
POST  
Formerly known as the Force PROM  
button. Momentary button on the switch  
used to reset the switch or place the switch  
in maintenance mode.  
Power On Self Test  
Power On Self Test (POST)  
Diagnostics that the switch chassis  
performs at start up.  
Maintenance Mode  
Formerly known as force PROM mode.  
Maintenance mode sets the IP address to  
10.0.0.1 and provides access to the switch  
for maintenance purposes.  
Principal Switch  
The switch in the fabric that manages  
domain ID assignments.  
Management Information Base  
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
A set of guidelines and definitions for  
SNMP functions.  
Switch management application.  
SFP  
Management Workstation  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable.  
PC workstation that manages the fabric  
through the fabric management switch.  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable  
A transceiver device, smaller than a  
GigaBit Interface Converter, that plugs into  
the Fibre Channel port.  
Mesh Topology  
A fabric in which each chassis has at least  
one port directly connected to each other  
chassis in the fabric.  
59226-00 B  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
SNMP  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Soft Zone  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes  
of controlling discovery. Members of the  
same soft zone automatically discover and  
communicate freely with all other  
members of the same zone.  
Target  
A storage device that responds to an  
initiator device.  
User Account  
An object stored on a switch that consists  
of an account name, password, authority  
level, and expiration date.  
VCCI  
Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
World Wide Name (WWN)  
A unique 64-bit address assigned to a  
device by the device manufacturer.  
WWN  
World Wide Name  
Zone  
A set of ports or devices grouped together  
to control the exchange of information.  
Zone Set  
A set of zones grouped together. The  
active zone set defines the zoning for a  
fabric.  
Zoning Database  
The set of zone sets, zones, and aliases  
stored on a switch.  
Glossary-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
B
account name  
Admin  
C
chassis  
administrative state  
alarm  
configuration  
alias  
auto save  
59226-00 B  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
event logging  
D
data window  
database  
default  
F
fabric  
domain ID  
E
event browser  
fabric view file  
Index-2  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
faceplate display  
FDMI - See Fabric Device Management  
firmware  
I
internal  
IP  
L
link  
G
log  
H
59226-00 B  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
loop port  
Non-Disruptive Code Load and Activation  
O
online  
M
memory  
P
password  
N
name server  
performance  
performance graph  
NDCLA - See Non-Disruptive Code Load and  
network  
Network Time Protocol  
Performance View  
nickname  
performance view file  
Index-4  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
A
port  
Q
R
reset  
S
SANsurfer Switch Manager  
power on self test  
preferences  
SANsurfer Switch Manager installation  
properties  
59226-00 B  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox 1400 Series Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
S
Simple Network Management Protocol  
switch  
symbolic name  
system configuration  
T
tool bar  
Index-6  
59226-00 B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA Microwave Oven RMW778 User Guide
Remington Power Tools Chainsaw 106890 01 User Guide
Ricoh Digital Camera Caplio R6 User Guide
Rolls Power Supply RPL108 User Guide
Rose electronic Network Card CrystalView User Guide
Runco Home Theater System Q 750D User Guide
Ryobi Saw CSB120 User Guide
Ryobi Saw csb140lz User Guide
Samsung DVD Recorder DVD R131 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television DP58D34 User Guide